2015 Challenger OM 6th

2015 Challenger
2015
OWNERS MANUAL
Challenger
FCA US LLC
15D491-126-AF Sixth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA features and equipment that are either standard or op-
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this
accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
portation. factured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 8

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
tion.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Owners Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicles equipment.
tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owners Manual
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owners Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart-
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .20
Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .14 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .20
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .23
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .23 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .40
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED . .25 Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .52
DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .87
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
AUTO-Down Feature If Equipped . . . . . . . .37 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 2
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob against the Engine START/STOP button and
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with push to operate the ignition.
the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
Keyless Push Button Ignition

1 OFF
2 ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 ON/RUN
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand. 2
Emergency Key Removal

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
WARNING!
Opening the drivers door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
cluster. access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the dren should be warned not to touch the parking
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
feature is programmable. Refer to Uconnect Settings in a location accessible to children, and do not
in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
information. Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
WARNING! (Continued)
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
Do not leave children or animals inside parked (KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may 2
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are pro-
cause serious injury or death. grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
CAUTION! if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition
in the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
the vehicle unattended. Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
SENTRY KEY indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation engine being shut off after two seconds.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal Replacement Keys
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
as possible by an authorized dealer.
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
tended.
problems and loss of security protection.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
been programmed to the vehicle electronics. position.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-

rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys- VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
authorized dealer. and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch 2
Customer Key Programming for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the
performed at an authorized dealer.
alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the fol-
General Information lowing audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the
subject to the following conditions: instrument cluster will flash.
This device may not cause harmful interference. Rearming Of The System
This device must accept any interference that may be If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
received, including interference that may cause unde- disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after approxi-
sired operation. mately 29 seconds, turn off all of the visual signals after
5 seconds, and then the system will rearm itself up to 8
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved times.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
users authority to operate the equipment.
To Arm The System same exterior zone (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go in
Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
further information).
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
position (refer to Starting Procedures in Starting (RKE) transmitter.
And Operating for further information).
3. If any doors are open, close them.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF. To Disarm The System
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF, and the the following methods:
key is physically removed from the ignition.
Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the Entry (RKE) transmitter.
vehicle:
Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
with the driver and/or passenger door open. equipped, refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go in Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further
Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
information).
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
Advance the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
position. Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
NOTE: 2
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
The drivers door key cylinder and the Trunk button Vehicle Security Alarm.
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
Vehicle Security Alarm. becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
power trunk entry. Pushing the trunk button will not exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the Tamper Alert
alarm will sound.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
Security System Manual Override NOTE:
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
doors using the manual door lock plunger. tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the Dome defeat position (extreme bottom position).
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
(extreme bottom position).
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
outside mirrors if equipped. Refer to Mirrors in The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur- open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
ther information. tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
system.
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above To Unlock The Doors
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters. transmitter once to unlock the drivers door or twice 2
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
Keyless Enter-N-Go under Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the drivers door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to Uconnect Settings in Under-
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter standing Your Instrument Panel for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the Sound Horn With Lock
current setting, refer to Uconnect Settings in Under-
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
standing Your Instrument Panel for further information.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
Headlight Illumination On Approach turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. Instrument Panel for further information.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles To Unlatch The Trunk
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current set-
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
ting, refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
Your Instrument Panel for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Starting Your Vehicle for further information.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Using The Panic Alarm You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted 2
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, Programming Additional Transmitters
and the interior lights will turn on.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless performed at an authorized dealer.
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
Transmitter Battery Replacement
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater. The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Perchlorate Material special handling may apply.
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
horn will remain on.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways seal during removal.
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter Case

3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency Key Removal (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal, if solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the by the party responsible for compliance could void the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause users authority to operate the equipment.
2
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
with rubbing alcohol. distance, check for these two conditions:
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two 1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
halves together, reposition and secure the screw as the battery is a minimum of three years.
shown in step #2 for removal.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
General Information
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and radios.
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions: REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED
This device may not cause harmful interference.

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
This device must accept any interference received, (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
including interference that may cause undesired op- niently from outside the vehicle while still
eration. maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: RKE PANIC button not pushed
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic System not disabled from previous remote start event
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
Vehicle security alarm not active
Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start WARNING!
All of the following conditions must be met before the Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
engine will remote start: confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
Shift lever in PARK oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
Doors closed jury or death when inhaled.
Hood closed Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
Hazard switch off System, windows, door locks or other controls
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) could cause serious injury or death.
Battery at an acceptable charge level

To Enter Remote Start Mode The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
activated by pushing the START/STOP button twice
Push and release the REMOTE START button 2
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec- (or the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
third cycle.
lights will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute Vehicle
cycle.
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
NOTE: allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
If an engine fault is present, the vehicle will start and NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
then shut down 10 seconds later. will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Start request.
Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the
in the Remote Start mode. UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the Low Fuel Light turns on.
door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
The hood is opened.
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button. The hazard switch is pushed.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N- The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
Go feature, the message Push Button/Insert Key will
The brake pedal is pushed.
display in the Driver Information Display (DID) until
you push the START button. DOOR LOCKS
Cancel Remote Start Manual Door Locks
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
occur: trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door
The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm. lock knob on each door trim panel upward.
Any engine warning lights come on.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of a 2
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
Door Lock Knob warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, or the gear selector.
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door. (Continued)
Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks

The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to
Keyless Enter-N-Go in Things To Know Before
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
is on, and either door is open, the power locks will not returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the 2
3. The transmission is in PARK.
Key Fob in the vehicle. Turning off the ignition or closing
the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, 4. The driver door is opened.
the ignition is either cycled to ACC or RUN (engine not
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
running), a chime will sound as a reminder.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Door Locks If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
when the vehicles speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The enabled or disabled. Refer to Uconnect Settings in
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in-
authorized dealer or through the Uconnect Settings in formation.
your radio.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit in accordance with local laws.
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO To Unlock From The Drivers Side:
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
vehicles Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you handle to unlock the drivers door automatically. The
to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. unlocked.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel for further information.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining
on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity
can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry door handle
and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle
will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security
alarm. Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front Transmitter In Vehicle
drivers door handle. To select between Unlock Driver 2
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press, refer to
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
To Unlock From The Passenger Side: is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
door handle to unlock both doors automatically. The have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any Passive Entry RKE trans-
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
unlocked. mitters. If one of the vehicles Passive Entry RKE trans-
mitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the
door handle is grabbed regardless of the drivers door
vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks
unlock preference setting (Unlock Driver Door 1st
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the
Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press).
third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry
RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Enter The Trunk: NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicles Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
of the deck lid, push the button located on the center of
another one of the vehicles Passive Entry RKE transmit-
the light bar which is located on the deck lid above the
ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
license plate.
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicles Doors:
With one of the vehicles Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock both
doors.
Trunk Passive Entry Button

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
2
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking

NOTE: WINDOWS
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait Power Windows
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, The window controls on the drivers door control both of
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to the door windows.
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicles interior door panel.
Power Window Switches

There is a single window control on the passengers door
trim panel that operates the window on the passengers
door. The window controls will operate only when the
WARNING!
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
NOTE: Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do 2
not let children play with power windows. Do not
The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
either front door is opened. The time for this feature is N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
programmable. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Un- particularly unattended children, can become en-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor- trapped by the windows while operating the power
mation. window switches. Such entrapment may result in
The door window will lower slightly if it is closed serious injury or death.
completely when opening the door. The window will AUTO-Down Feature If Equipped
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance The drivers door power window switch and passenger
and prevents window and seal damage. door power window switch have an AUTO-down fea-
ture. Push the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
to the first detent and release it when you want the button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmis-
window to stop. sion, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the button will operate.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for up to The trunk lid can be released from
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. outside the vehicle by pushing the
Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for Trunk Release button on the Re-
this feature is programmable. Refer to Uconnect Set- mote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for mitter twice within five seconds or
further information. by using the external release switch
located on the underside of the
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE decklid overhang. The release fea-
Trunk Release
ture will function only when the
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by Button
vehicle is in the unlock condition.
pushing the Trunk Release button. The button is located
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display WARNING! 2
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym- through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
bol will display until the trunk is closed. trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
Refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go in Things To Know the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
Before Starting Your Vehicle for more information on even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature. in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release Some of the most important safety features in your
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the vehicle are the restraint systems:
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
Seat Belt Systems
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism. Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, shoulder belts properly.
move the seat as far back as possible and use the 2
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
proper child restraint. (Refer to Child Restraints)
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle Air Bags room to inflate.
seat belt properly (Refer to Child Restraints) should
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
between occupants and the door and occupants could
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
be injured.
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
them or under their arm.
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
5. You should read the instructions provided with your under If You Need Assistance.
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
WARNING!
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of be belted at all times.
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child (BeltAlert)
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint. BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out-
with a rear seat. board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition
Seat Belt Systems switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted,
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
happen far away from home or on your own street. The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occu- vating BeltAlert. 2
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and
drivers or outboard front passengers (if equipped with
visual notification.
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
Lap/Shoulder Belts
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the lap/shoulder belts.
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
and cargo is properly stowed. normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In belts.
some collisions, the air bags wont deploy at all. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
Always wear your seat belt even though you have using a seat belt properly.
air bags. Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer injuries in a collision much worse. You might
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck- suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your safe, too.
vehicle are buckled up properly. Two people should never be belted into a single
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
or killed. than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued) (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces wont be at properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far 2
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat your seat belt snugly.
belt as low as possible and keep it snug. A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal
you cant straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take injuries. Ribs arent as strong as shoulder bones. Wear
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
it fixed. bones will take the force in a collision.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could you from injury during a collision. You are more
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter- likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
buckle nearest you. are meant to be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat. Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down Seat Belt Extender
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
shoulder belt.
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
anchor point. Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
WARNING!
the latch plate. ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. required in order to properly fit the original seat
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
the latch plate. if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the the occupants body is LESS than 6 inches.
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
(Continued)
Seat Belt Pretensioner
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat 2
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
recommended seating positions. Remove and store slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is worn snugly and positioned properly.
the best way to keep the baby safe.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Restraints section of this manual. The table below If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
defines the type of feature for each seating position. ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupants mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint. 2
wrap around the occupants mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
Children 12 years old and under should always be the entire seat belt is extracted.
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
WARNING!
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
(Continued)
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
locking mode.
Air Bag System Components
WARNING! Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea- Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
ture or any other seat belt function is not working Air Bag Warning Light
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual. Steering Wheel and Column
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could Instrument Panel
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain Knee Impact Bolsters
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children Advanced Front Air Bags
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing Supplemental Side Air Bags
child restraints that have a harness for restraining Front and Side Impact Sensors
the child.
Seat Belt Pretenioners
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Seat Track Position Sensors
2
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The drivers Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passengers Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on Advanced Front Air Bags And Knee Impact Bolster
the air bag covers. Locations
1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
WARNING!
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument which may receive information from the front impact
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment sensors or other system components.
could cause serious injury, including death. Air The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
instrument panel. output is used for more severe collisions.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear- inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
facing child restraint. seat position.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
with a rear seat. passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
Advanced Front Air Bag Features the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides

No objects should be placed over or near the air some collisions, air bags wont deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air 2
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the bags.
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
air bags to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
damage the air bags and you could be injured vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
because the air bags may no longer be functional. of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
designed to open only when the air bags are collisions, including some that may produce substantial
inflating. vehicle damage for example, some pole collisions,
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
(Continued)
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration Knee Impact Bolsters
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
have deployed. pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Air Bags.
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag. WARNING!
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large bolsters in any way.
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
Advanced Front Air Bags. bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right radios, etc.
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the Supplemental Side Air Bags
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while 1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. board side of the seatbacks trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the 2
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label pushed into you, causing serious injury.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury 2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or
seat belts and body structure. AIRBAG.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle
rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction poten-
tial provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
WARNING!
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) de-
2
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
high enough to block the deployment of the based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win- damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path Side Air Bags should have deployed.
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
tions.
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
infant or child restraint.
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason. Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags wont
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat though you have Side Air Bags.
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
WARNING!
Side Impacts
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
center of the seat. determining the appropriate response to impact events.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy- The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
ment could cause you to be severely injured or the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
killed. Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
(Continued)
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy 2
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
Front Air Bags deploy. experiences a near rollover event.
Rollover Events If A Deployment Occurs
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of immediately after deployment.
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro- NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not the air bag system.
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. or all of the following may occur:
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric- Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by bags will not be in place to protect you.
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you havent healed WARNING!
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately. Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the System serviced as well.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or NOTE:
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
but they will open during air bag deployment.
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturers in-
structions for cleaning. After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System System Reset Procedure
In the event of an impact, if the communication network In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending functions after an event, the ignition must be changed 2
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
Air Bag Warning Light
tem perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine. The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF posi- straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
tion. circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
turned to the OFF position. the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
Unlock the doors automatically. the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or dealer service the air bag system immediately.
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds first turned to the ON/RUN position.
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
eight-second interval.
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A remains on while driving.
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
again after initial startup.
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc- the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. system immediately.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
WARNING!
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
2
ment panel could mean you wont have the air bags or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come service the vehicle immediately. For additional information
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to the
the on position, and stays on after you start the Instrument Panel section of this manual.
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an Maintaining Your Air Bag System
authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
WARNING!
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is be injured if the air bag system is not there to
detected, which could affect the Supplemental protect you. Do not modify the components or
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
(Continued)
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
add aftermarket side steps or running boards. (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. assist in understanding how a vehicles systems per-
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
not function properly if modifications are made. time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any is designed to record such data as:
air bag system service. If your seat, including your How various systems in your vehicle were operating
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your were buckled/fastened
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelera-
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
tor and/or brake pedal
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer. How fast the vehicle was traveling
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children. 2
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- province, requires that small children ride in proper
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- ecuted for ignoring it.
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
crash investigation. buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is the rear seats rather than in the front.
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, WARNING!
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
vehicle or the EDR. projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
great that you could not hold the child, no matter Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
how strong you are. The child and others could be it in the vehicle where you will use it.
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the childs size. NOTE:
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
or call 18667328243.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canadas
seat Owners Manual to make sure you have the correct website for additional information: http://
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owners childsafety-index-53.htm
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

2
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
height or weight limits of their child rear seat of the vehicle
restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two years old Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
or who have out-grown the height or five-point Harness, facing forward in the
weight limit of their rear-facing child rear seat of the vehicle
restraint
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
forward-facing child restraint, but are vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
too small to properly fit the vehicles of the vehicle
seat belt
Children Too Large for Children 12 years old or younger, who Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
Child Restraints have out-grown the height or weight of the vehicle
limit of their booster seat
Infants And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
It is recommended for children from birth until they with a rear seat.
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or Older Children And Child Restraints
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
carrier but are still less than at least two years old. tion are for children who are over two years old or who
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
child seat.
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint. 2
All children whose weight or height is above the After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicles seat belts because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicles seat cushion while the childs back is against the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
in the vehicle by the seat belt. the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
WARNING! loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
Improper installation can lead to failure of an could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a serious personal injury.
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturers
(Continued)
Children Too Large For Booster Seats 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt If the answer to any of these questions was no, then the
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
over the front of the seat when their back is against the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the A childs squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
vehicles seat belt alone: position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
the vehicle seat? a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
2. Do the childs knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the WARNING!
way back?
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the childs shoulder arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
between their neck and arm? will not protect a child properly, which may result in
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching serious injury or death. A child must always wear
the childs thighs and not their stomach? both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below 2
Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor
Restraint Only + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
Restraint System equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicles
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
What is the weight limit (childs weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
weight of the child restraint) for using the the combined weight of the child and the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
child restraint? seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
belt be used together to attach a rear- LATCH anchorage system to attach a
facing or forward-facing child restraint? rear-facing or forward-facing child re-
straint.
Can two child restraints be attached using No Never share a LATCH anchorage with
a common lower LATCH anchorage? two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH an-
chorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
the back of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See 2
your child restraint owners manual for
more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center only may be removed.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating Tether Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
There are tether strap anchorages behind each Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
rear seating position located in the panel be- anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
tween the rear seatback and the rear window. anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
They are found under a plastic cover with the rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether anchorage symbol on it. tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
Tether Strap Anchorages

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
WARNING!
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
2
than one child restraint. Please refer to Installing anchorages.
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System for 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
typical installation instructions. that seating position. For some second row seats, you
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu- may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
restraint systems will be installed as described here. forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto- to allow more room for the child seat.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
belt, following the instructions below. See the section restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt ing position.
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
top tether anchorage. See the section Installing Child installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc- buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
tions to attach a tether anchor. the childs reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
turers instructions.
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by them.
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) WARNING!
in any direction.
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt: LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions
used by other occupants or being used to secure child exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
(Continued)
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the
Child restraint anchorages are designed to with- webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted 2
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for into the retractor. Refer to the Automatic Locking
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Mode description under Occupant Restraints for ad-
ditional information on ALR.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
What is the weight limit (childs Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child re- using the seat belt to install a for-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to 2
with the seat belt to attach a forward the recommended weight limit of
facing child restraint? the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passen-
touch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat? allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re- Yes Center Only may be removed
moved?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt seating position with an ALR re-
path of the child restraint? tractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
You may also move the front seat forward to allow bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor lap portion around the child restraint while you push
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. the child restraint rearward and downward into the
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
click. tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight strap. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using
against the child seat. the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) (LATCH) Restraint System for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle. 2
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat 1. Look behind the seating position where you
to any location in front of the car seat, including the plan to install the child restraint to find the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether anchorage. You may need to move the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether seat forward to provide better access to the
anchorage that is approved for that seating position, tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the anchorage for that seating position, move the
section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren child restraint to another position in the ve-
hicle if one is available.
(Continued)
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook
3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to

the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets
restraint manufacturers instructions. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly 2
WARNING! injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to a collision.
increased head motion and possible injury to the Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
child. Use only the anchorage position directly or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, For vehicles equipped with the 3.6L or 5.7L use the
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the following engine break-in recommendations:
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap. A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
be detrimental and should be avoided. not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
the break in period. Add oil as required.
installed at the factory is high-quality and energy-
conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be For vehicles equipped with the 6.4L use the following
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under engine break-in recommendations:
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
Despite modern technology and World Class manufac-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to Mainte-
turing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still
nance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle.
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through
CAUTION! the first oil change interval.
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
It is recommended for the operator to observe the following Avoid aggressive braking.
driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in period:
Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km): 2
Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and
Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an observe local speed limits.
extended period of time.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
Push the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
(paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible.
Avoid aggressive braking.
Do not perform sustained operation with the accelera-
Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM. tor pedal at wide open throttle.
Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
observe local speed limits. observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km): For the first 1500 mi (2414 km):
Push the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than Do not participate in track events, sport driving
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears (1st schools, or similar activities during the first 1500 mi
to 3rd gears). (2414 km).
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO Exhaust Gas
AREA.
WARNING!
WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
Do not leave children or animals inside parked monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
cause serious injury or death. eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, follow these safety tips:
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously confined areas any longer than needed to move
injured or killed. your vehicle in or out of the area.
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are 2
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the Vehicle
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling Seat Belts
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
Air Bag Warning Light Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
The light should come on and remain on for vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
not lit during starting, see your authorized or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized WARNING!
dealer.
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
Defroster vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place sonal injury.
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to Always make sure that floor mats are properly
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your attached to the floor mat fasteners.
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper- Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-
able. ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor Tires 2
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
pedal area and interfere with the pedals. patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
been removed for cleaning. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and Lights
accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
If required, mounting posts must be properly in- exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
stalled, if not equipped from the factory. signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or panel.
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of Door Latches
control of the vehicle. Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 3
MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped . . .101
Rear Cross Path If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .116
Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .107
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Heated Mirrors If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .108
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Vanity Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Front Heated Seats If Equipped . . . . . . . . .122
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Front Ventilated Seats If Equipped . . . . . . .124
Slide-On-Rod And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment . . .124
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Passenger Seat Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Fog Lights If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .131
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Automatic Headlights If Equipped . . . . . . .134
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .143
Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 3
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) IF
Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped . . . . . . . .145 EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .147 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .156
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .157
COLUMN IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED . .149
To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .163 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .167
ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .168
ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .170
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . .187
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .188
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 ParkSense System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .189
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation . .178 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Changing FCW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Closing Sunroof Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED . . .194 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .204
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . .195 Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
3
Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 Venting Sunroof Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .197 Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .199 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .206
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .202 Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Opening Sunroof Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Opening Sunroof Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .203 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
MIRRORS Push the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is Push the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind- the feature Off.
3
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-
abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned Automatic Dimming Mirror
On or Off through the touchscreen. If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
NOTE: The ASSIST and 911 features operate through Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other
the Uconnect Access service. These buttons will only vehicle issues.
operate as long as your Uconnect Access service is 9-1-1 Call
active. Refer to your Uconnect System supplement
manual for further information. 1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
ASSIST Call NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
to any one of the following support centers:
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire, or need a Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
tow, just push the Assist button and youll be con- Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
will know what vehicle youre driving and its location.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
Uconnect Access Customer Care In-vehicle support connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via
Mobile features.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicles
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to
operator: determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1
Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call. operator opens a voice connection with the vehicles 9-1-1 3
Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you
The vehicle brand. or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle. the vehicle. The vehicles 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to
remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator operator terminates the connection.
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed. 5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
(Continued)

or location), do not wait for voice contact from a Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle could cause the air bag system to fail when you
immediately and move to a safe location. need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi- is not there to help protect you.
cles electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicles electrical sys- 9-1-1 Call System Limitations
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter- Call system capabilities.
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way 9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
vehicles electrical system or modify the antennas If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT- following may occur at the time the malfunction is
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE. and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
(Continued)
The Phone Screen will display the following message
Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer. send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state Vehicle phone dealer service the ORC system immediately. 3
requires service. Please contact your dealer.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
WARNING! beyond FCA US LLCs control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you limited to, the following factors:
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized Delayed accessories mode is active.
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately. The ignition is in the OFF position.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel The vehicles electrical systems are not intact.
if a malfunction in any part of the system is The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi- damaged during a crash.
nated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
(Continued)
Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals General Information
are unavailable or obstructed.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator. this device must accept any interference received, includ-
Wireless network congestion. ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
Weather. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. users authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicles
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless CAUTION!
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
properly. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. the vehicle and three detents (counterclockwise) towards
the front of the vehicle. 3
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Folding Mirrors
Power Mirrors The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
door trim panel. mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to Rear
Power Mirror Controls
Window Features in Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle for further information.
Vanity Mirrors
A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
3
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Slide-On-Rod And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the Slide-On-Rod feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) IF EQUIPPED
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
visor and pull rearward. based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Slide-On-Rod Extender
Rear Detection Zones

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
3
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake
is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the BSM Warning Light
vehicle is stationary. The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The
zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
NOTE:
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de- per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
tection zones.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information.
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle. side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
3
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service. 3
Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path If Equipped

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
Opposing Traffic vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
WARNING!
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
(Continued)
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the 3
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
RCP Detection Zones parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
situations. death.
Modes Of Operation turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in-
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
formation.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only be reduced.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
system, the radio volume is reduced.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible the appropriate visual alert only.
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
the RCP state always requests the chime.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
Blind Spot Alert Off 2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
eration of the device.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void 3
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
authorization to use this equipment.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and SEATS
used.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
General Information vehicle.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications WARNING!
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
(Continued)
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are
used to control the position of the seat. Power Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar sup-
port. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
raise and lower the position of the support.
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached. 3
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar Power Lumbar Switch
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seats
control which could cause a collision and serious path.
injury or death.
Front Heated Seats If Equipped
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury The front heated seats control buttons are located within
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat setting ON.
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the LO setting ON.
CAUTION!
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn
Do not place any article under a power seat or the heating elements OFF.
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
(Continued)
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
WARNING!
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap- spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- 3
proximately 45 minutes. tion or other physical condition must exercise care
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
to operate. even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
On models that are equipped with remote start, the insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
heated seats can be programed to come on during a This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
remote start. in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect ture of the seat.
system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel for further information.
Front Ventilated Seats If Equipped NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans seats to operate.
that draw the air from the passenger compartment and Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to
help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
HI and LO. remote start.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understand-
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls ing Your Instrument Panel for further information.
screen. Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI. The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or
choose LO. rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Using body pressure, move forward and rear-
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
turn the ventilated seat OFF. latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be 3
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Seatback Recline

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
Recline Lever
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Passenger Seat Easy Entry
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located
on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback
and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily
remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and
allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows
for easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a
normal seating position, first return the seatback to its
original recline location and then slide the entire seat
back to the pre-set lock position.
Easy Entry Lever

Head Restraints Active Head Restraints Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants 3
head and the AHR.
WARNING! The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop- position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- return to their normal position see your authorized
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- dealer immediately.
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the

rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, remove the seat belt from
the seat belt loop. Raise the head restraint as far as it can
go then push the adjustment button and the release
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes while pushing the adjust-
ment button and release button. Then adjust it to the
Head Restraint appropriate height.
1 Release Button
WARNING!
2 Adjustment Button
3 Seat Belt Loop A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
(Continued)
Folding Rear Seat
stow removed head restraints in a location outside The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
the occupant compartment. additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or
both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when 3
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper- not in use.
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
Folding Rear Seat

WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta-
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
Folded Rear Seat be seated and using the proper restraint system.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, the safety catch is
Two latches must be released to open the hood. located under the center front edge of the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel. 3
Hood Safety Catch Location
Hood Release Lever

3. Push the safety catch to the left.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Hood Safety Catch Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of 3

the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-
rior lights and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Automatic Headlights If Equipped is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
this feature.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic further information.
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control If
position.
Equipped
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
will come on in the automatic mode.
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
Automatic Headlights Only) mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is from high beams to low beams until the approaching
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature vehicle is out of view.
NOTE: If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
dealer.
3
ment Panel for further information. To Activate
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to position.
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv-
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high- To Deactivate
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
ignition off.
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us-
system. ing the Uconnect System, refer to Uconnect Settings
in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further
Headlight Time Delay
information.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an Daytime Running Lights (DRL) If Equipped
unlit area. The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the
engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
engine is shut Off.
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off. NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru-
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch ment Panel for further information.
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the drivers door is opened.
3
Fog Lights If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals Lane Change Assist
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. three times then automatically turn off.
3
NOTE: High/Low Beam Switch
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is Flash-To-Pass
defective.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
A Turn Signal On message will appear in the Drivers lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi released.
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams
will shut off.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Overhead Console
Interior Lights Dimmer Controls
The interior lights come on when a door is opened. The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to 3
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left Dome Light Position
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
equipped). lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
OFF position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in settings for high-speed wiper operation.
the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction 3
lever is located on the left side of the steering column. CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second Windshield Washers
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. washer spray is desired.
Mist Feature If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road several wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will and then resume the intermittent interval previously
continue to operate until you release the multifunction selected.
lever. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer turned off, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the and then turn off.
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid. WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
(Continued)
In this case (auto wipes) the headlights will turn off if no
wipes occurs in 240 Seconds.
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
windshield with the defroster before and during and off using the Uconnect System, refer to Uconnect
Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for 3
windshield washer use.
further information.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped
Automatic Headlights Only)
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO) position. In from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. to activate this feature.
NOTE: For vehicle equipped with rain sensor (auto The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
wipes), please note that in addition to the 10 seconds, the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
headlights can also turn on if the Rain Sensing feature is sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi-
ON, and the front wipers complete a minimum of 5 wipe tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
cycles within 60 seconds. Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
OFF position when not using the system. perature is greater than 32F (0C).
NOTE: Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the shift lever is
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind- moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
shield.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone Uconnect System, refer to Uconnect Settings in
may reduce Rain Sensing performance. Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in-
formation.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in 3
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
steering column.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch

To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
WARNING!
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. control button through the climate screen or the controls
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- screen.
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause Press the heated steering wheel button 3
once to
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to turn the heating element ON.
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death. Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps steering wheel to operate.
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up On models that are equipped with remote start, the
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn during a remote start through the Uconnect system.
on when the steering wheel is already warm. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your
Instrument Panel for further information.
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
WARNING!
right side of the steering wheel.
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Electronic Speed Control Buttons
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 1 ON/OFF 4 SET-/DECEL
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 2 SET+/ACCEL 5 CANCEL
3 RESUME
(40 km/h).
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
WARNING!
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. 3
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired You could lose control and have an accident. Always
vehicle set speed. leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control button and release. Release the accelerator and the ve-
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a hicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control (km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use. CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
To Deactivate The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to Under-
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
standing Your Instrument Panel for more information.
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition U.S. Speed (mph)
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory. Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
To Resume Speed increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
above 20 mph (32 km/h). continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
crease speed by pushing the SET + button. button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established. the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed Metric Speed (km/h)
3
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET - button. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to Under- If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel for more information. continue to decrease until the button is released, then
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen the new set speed will be established.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Accelerate For Passing
U.S. Speed (mph)
Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the
Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph. Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) IF
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on EQUIPPED
moderate hills is normal. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
Control. safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
WARNING! Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve- light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads NOTE:
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
WARNING!
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
The Cruise Control system has two control modes: system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the drivers responsibil- 3
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
appropriate distance between vehicles. conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruis- ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ing at a constant preset speed. For additional informa- ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
tion, refer to Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
Mode in this section. quired while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
NOTE: The normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not result in a collision and death or serious personal
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode injury.
selected. The ACC system:
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
buttons. The two control modes function differently. and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
Always confirm which mode is selected. traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow- 1 NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
2 SET+/ACCEL
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill 3 RESUME
slopes. 4 SET-/DECEL
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. 5 DISTANCE SETTING INCREASE
6 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a 7 DISTANCE SETTING DECREASE
constant speed. 8 CANCEL
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive conditions:
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
When you apply the brakes.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
When the parking brake is set. 3
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h). When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
The system will cancel when the vehicle speed drops
below 15 mph (24 km/h). When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph When the brakes are overheated.
(32 km/h). To Activate/Deactivate
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays ACC ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays
Ready. ACC Ready.
When the system is OFF, the DID displays Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Adaptive Cruise Control Off

To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
WARNING!
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the DID will display Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off. on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
(Continued)
The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
want. You could lose control and have a collision. speed will only be determined by the position of the
Always leave the system off when you are not using accelerator pedal.
it. 3
To Cancel
To Set A Desired ACC Speed The following conditions cancel the system:
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
The brake pedal is applied.
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
will display the set speed. The CANCEL button is pressed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h).
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
speed of the vehicle.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set Drive position.
speed. If this occurs: The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
the DID. The vehicle parking brake is applied.
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
WARNING!
The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
To Turn Off and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
memory if: road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control follow these warnings can result in a collision and
ON/OFF button is pushed. death or serious personal injury.
The ignition is turned off.
To Vary The Speed Setting
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is To Increase Speed
pushed.
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
To Resume pressing the SET + button.
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume) The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to Under-
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed. standing Your Instrument Panel for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
U.S. Speed (mph)
in the DID.
Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph To Decrease Speed 3
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph. While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing the SET - button.
If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to Under-
in the DID. standing Your Instrument Panel for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
Metric Speed (km/h) speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h U.S. Speed (mph)
button results in an increase of 1 km/h. Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the engines braking power does not slow the vehicle
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
flected in the DID. will automatically slow the vehicle.
Metric Speed (km/h) The ACC system applies the brake down to 15 mph
(24 km/h) when following a target vehicle.
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
flected in the DID.
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
NOTE: exceeds normal range (overheated).
When you override and push the SET + button or SET -
buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of
the vehicle.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC 3
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the DID.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance
Setting Decrease button and release. Each time the
button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one
bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the 3
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the Sensed Vehicle Indica-
tor icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automati-
cally to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Set- speed.
ting Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
(longer). the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
BRAKE will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
Brake Alert
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity. NOTE: The Brake! Screen in the DID is a warning for
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve- When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration not been selected, the display will read Adaptive Cruise
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. Control Ready.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver 3
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
passing on the left hand side.
ACC SET
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The instrument cluster.
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status. The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of System Cancel
the following displays in the DID:
Driver Override
Adaptive Cruise Control Off System Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read Adap-
ACC Proximity Warning
tive Cruise Control Off.
ACC Unavailable Warning The ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
The DID will return to the last display selected after
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
five seconds of no ACC display activity
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
Display Warnings And Maintenance vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle
this warning may temporarily occur.
Warning
The ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor NOTE: If the ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
to Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode in this
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display ACC/ examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor and the
system will deactivate. vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- When the condition that deactivated the system is no
tant to note the following maintenance items: longer present, the system will return to the Adaptive
Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
simply reactivating it.
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
3
the sensor lens. NOTE:
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so If the ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and Sensor message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
require a sensor realignment. once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
your authorized dealer.
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
ACC/FCW operation.
malfunction.
Service ACC/FCW Warning Offset Driving
If the system turns off, and the DID displays ACC/FCW ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
Unavailable Service Required or Cruise/FCW Unavail- offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
able Service Required, there may be an internal system in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC func- to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
tionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume 3
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example

Using ACC On Hills Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor- ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
mance may be limited. it may not detect the vehicle until its too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example

Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. 3
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Objects And Vehicles General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example

Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
WARNING!
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) warning does not activate and no alarm will sound 3
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h). maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
To change between the different control modes, push the selected.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) To Set A Desired Speed
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
trol mode.
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON- If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
speed control is SET. in the DID display.
To Vary The Speed Setting Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to Under- continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
standing Your Instrument Panel for more information. button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of in the DID display.
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: To Decrease Speed
U.S. Speed (mph) When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to Under- continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
standing Your Instrument Panel for more information. button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed flected in the DID display.
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: 3
To Cancel
U.S. Speed (mph) The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the memory:
button results in a decrease of 1 mph. The brake pedal is applied.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will The CANCEL button is pushed.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
flected in the DID display. tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
Metric Speed (km/h) The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the heated).
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) IF
Drive position. EQUIPPED
To Resume Speed Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings
20 mph (32 km/h). (within the DID), to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to
To Turn Off
provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in mitigate the potential collision.
memory if:
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
ON/OFF button is pushed. (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
The ignition is turned off. When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is visual warnings.
pushed.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(10 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than 3
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
FCW Message surroundings.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
WARNING!
message will be deactivated. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
(Continued)
Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the in front of you.
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death. NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
Turning FCW ON Or OFF will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
NOTE: The default status of FCW is On, this allows Changing FCW Status
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the The FCW Sensitivity Settings are programmable through
vehicle in front of you. the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in
The forward collision button is located on the switch Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in-
panel below the Uconnect display. formation.
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision The default status of FCW is the Far setting is the On
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on). setting, this allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward
farther away. This gives you the most reaction time to
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns
avoid a possible collision.
off).
Changing the FCW status to the Near setting, allows Service FCW Warning
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting, ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required 3
NOTE: This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
The system will retain the last setting selected by the the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
driver after ignition shut down. the system checked by an authorized dealer.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the EQUIPPED
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
higher rate of speed.
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense Sys-
screens. tem Usage Precautions in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
changed to the ON/RUN position. Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect
ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understand-
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever ing Your Instrument Panel for further information.
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
6 mph (9 km/h). Driver Information Display (DID) in Understanding
ParkSense Sensors Your Instrument Panel for further information.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ ParkSense Display
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
within the sensors field of view. The sensors can detect will turn ON indicating the system status.
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacles
tion of the obstacle. distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the 3
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
continuous.
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
3
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

WARNING ALERTS
Rear Greater than 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
Distance 79 in (200 cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 (120-100 (100-65 (65-30 cm) 12 in
(in/cm) cm) cm) cm) (30 cm)
Audible None Single 1/2- Slow Slow Fast Fast Continu-
Alert Second Tone (for rear (for rear (for rear ous
Chime (for rear cen- center center center
ter only) only) only) only)
Arc Left None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flash-
Rear ing ing
Arc None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash- 2nd Flash- 1st Flash-
Center ing ing ing
Rear
Arc None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flash-
Right Rear ing ing
Radio Vol- No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ume Re-
duced
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense When the ParkSense system is disabled, the
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Drivers Information Display (DID) will display
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the PARKSENSE OFF message for approxi-
mately five seconds. Refer to Drivers Informa-
the Uconnect display.
tion Display (DID) in Understanding Your Instrument 3
Panel for further information. When the shift lever is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID
will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense is disabled or defective. The ParkSense
switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If
the ParkSense switch is pushed and the system is dis-
abled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense Switch
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
System SORS appears in the Driver Information Display (DID),
make sure the outer surface and the inside of the rear
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
ignition cycle and it will display the PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED
PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
message for five seconds. Refer to Driver Information
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Display (DID) in Understanding Your Instrument
Panel for further information. Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver
age the sensors.
Information Display (DID) will display the
PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS
or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio when
it is sounding an audio tone.
NOTE:
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system oper- 3
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
ating properly.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
affect the performance of ParkSense or render the obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
system temporarily unavailable. a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE, the instru-
ment cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF for five Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as
seconds. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you 12 inches 30 (cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure
cycle the ignition. to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position
PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED
and ParkSense is turned off, the Driver Information
message to be displayed in the Driver Information
Display (DID) will display PARKSENSE OFF message
Display (DID).
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
the sensors will not be detected when they are in tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
close proximity. so can result in serious injury or death.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended EQUIPPED
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
using ParkSense. Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
WARNING! the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
(Continued)
check entire surroundings across the top of the screen. When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera
After five seconds this note will disappear. delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
3
through the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for projected backup path based on the steering wheel
further information. position.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be the vehicle.
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
The following table shows the approximate distances for
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
each zone:
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING! CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- drive path.
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
must continue to pay attention while backing up. stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds

up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights At the forward end of the overhead console are two
and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener courtesy/reading lights.
(HomeLink) button and a power sunroof switch may Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
also be included, if equipped. 3
to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a push/push design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
Overhead Console
GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink chan-
nels. The HomeLink indicator is located on the left side
of the first button.
HomeLink Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming. programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis- erase channels when programming additional buttons.
3
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink For programming garage door openers that were manu-
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
indicator flashes. identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
Training The Garage Door Opener from slow to rapid.
1 Door Opener 5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
2 Training Button
locate the LEARN or TRAINING button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the LEARN or TRAIN-
ING button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. (Rolling Code)
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
step after the LEARN button has been pushed. follow these steps:
3
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
activates, programming is complete. not release the button.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- 3. Without releasing the button proceed with Program-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to ming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining
complete the training. steps.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels. For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view. erase the channels.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
program while you push and hold the hand-held (Non-Rolling Code)
transmitter button. To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- follow these steps:
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
from slow to rapid. not release the button.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button 3. Without releasing the button proceed with Program-
and observe the indicator light. ming A Non-Rolling Code step 2 and follow all
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- remaining steps.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
that require the transmitter signals to time-out after transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
several seconds of transmission. successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when 3
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- fully trained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink 4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
time-out in the same manner. door may open and close while you are programming.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage and observe the indicator light.
door or gate motor. If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view. erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for Using HomeLink
programming, plug it back in at this time. To operate, push and release the programmed
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
(Canadian/Gate Operator) programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
follow these steps:
also be used at any time.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Security
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do in your vehicle.
not release the button.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
3. Without releasing the button proceed with seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming step 2 and channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
follow all remaining steps. erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
WARNING!
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink,
here are some of the most common solutions: Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit- while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas 3
ter. can cause serious injury or death.
Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener Your motorized door or gate will open and close
to complete the training for a Rolling Code. while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
Did you unplug the device for programming and
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
remember to plug it back in?
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please opener that has a stop and reverse feature as
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at required by Federal safety standards. This includes
HomeLink.com for information or assistance. most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the users authority to operate the device.
Power Sunroof Switch
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location object, to project through the sunroof opening. 3
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of Injury may result.
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in Opening Sunroof Express
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
by the power sunroof while operating the power second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
serious injury or death. open fully and stop automatically. This is called Express
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown Open. During Express Open operation, any movement
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten Opening Sunroof Manual Mode
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured. To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
(Continued)
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again. the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
Closing Sunroof Express struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
release to Express Close.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called Express Close. During Express NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
the sunroof. a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Closing Sunroof Manual Mode Venting Sunroof Express
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the Push and release the Vent button within one half second
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
forward again. movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation 3
open. The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
Wind Buffeting approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
will cancel this feature.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings/
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- Customer Programmable Features in Understanding
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with Your Instrument Panel for further information.
the front windows open, open the front windows to-
gether to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS The front power outlet is located next to the storage area
on the integrated center stack of the instrument panel.
Your vehicle is equipped with two 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical acces-
sories.
The 12 Volt power outlets have power available at all
times. These power outlets can also operate a conven-
tional cigar lighter unit.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR cigar
knob and element must be used.
Power Outlet Integrated Center Stack Front

Power Outlet Center Console Power Outlet Fuse Locations

NOTE: All accessories connected to these powered out- 1 #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated Center Stack
lets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is 2 #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
not in use to protect the battery against discharge.
CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Do not touch with wet hands.
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system vehicle.
will need to be replaced. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs shock and failure.
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the CAUTION!
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
Warranty. power from the vehicles battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicles battery will
WARNING! discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
To avoid serious injury or death: prevent the engine from starting.
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
CUPHOLDERS
CAUTION! (Continued)
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit- Front Cupholders
tently and with greater caution. The front cupholders are located in the center console.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or 3
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicles battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders STORAGE
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest Glove Compartment
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide conve-
of the instrument panel.
nient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupants elbows.
Glove Compartment
Rear Cupholders
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Refer to Universal Consumer Interface
(UCI) If Equipped in Understanding Your Instru-
3
Opened Glove Compartment

Console Storage
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest. The compartment contains a 12
Center Console
Volt power outlet, and a molded-in coin holder (designed
to hold various size coins). The center console may also
be equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
WARNING!
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the CAUTION!
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
a collision.
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
Rear Window Defroster the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
The rear window defroster button is located on heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button soaking with warm water.
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button window cleaners on the interior surface of the
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The window.
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap- Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .216 Uconnect SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE . . . . . . . . . .217 Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM . . . . . .218 Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .219 Customer Programmable Features
Uconnect 5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .228
Customer Programmable Features
Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Uconnect 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Performance Pages If Equipped . . . . . . . . .286
DID Yellow Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Performance Control If Equipped . . . . . . . .295
DID Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Uconnect RADIOS IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .309
DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED . .309 Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .312
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .312
Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . .335
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .322
Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Uconnect VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .339
4
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 Air Outlets 5 Keyless Start/Stop Button

2 Instrument Cluster 6 Trunk Release Button
3 Glove Box 7 Headlight Switch
4 Media Center
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE
Instrument Cluster For 3.6L or 5.7L

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM
Instrument Cluster For 6.4L

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
1. Tachometer poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red not require towing.
area. The transition of the red line starts 500 RPM prior to 4
the actual redline. 6.2L SC redline = 6250 RPM and 6.4L CAUTION!
redline = 6400 RPM.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
2. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
OBD system monitors engine and automatic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when Immediate service is required.
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine
start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key
from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
WARNING!
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such NOTE:
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
others. signal on.
3. Vehicle Security Light If Equipped Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security 5. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
until the vehicle is disarmed.
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans-
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
functioning and service is required. However, the con- chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
ventional brake system will continue to operate normally driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
if the BRAKE warning light is not on. the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If he/she
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced 4
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer. for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
6. Driver Information Display (DID) Area properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- the odometer must be reset at zero.
hicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows indi- The DID features an interactive display. Refer to Driver
vidual trip mileage. Information Display (DID) for further information.
7. Gear Status Indicator Automatic Transmission 9. Brake Warning Light
Only
This light monitors various brake functions,
The Gear Status Indicator is self-contained within the including brake fluid level and parking brake
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the application. If the brake light turns on it may
automatic transmission. indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
8. Seat Belt Reminder Light
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
placed in ON/RUN. A chime will sound if the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
drivers seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu- remain on until the condition has been corrected.
ously if the drivers seat belt remains unbuckled after the
bulb check or when driving. Refer to Occupant Re- The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve- ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
hicle for further information. system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
the brake fluid level checked.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. inspected by an authorized dealer. 4
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

WARNING! applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger- tion.
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
10. Air Bag Warning Light
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho- 14. Park/Headlight ON Indicator
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to Occupant
This indicator will illuminate when the park
Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your
lights or headlights are turned on.
Vehicle for further information.
11. Speedometer
15. Fuel Gauge
Indicates vehicle speed.
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
12. Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog 16. Temperature Gauge
lights are on.
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
13. High Beam Indicator ture. Any reading within the normal range for a fully
This indicator will turn on when the high beam warm vehicle should be 200 F - 230 F which indicates that
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
high beam. ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
17. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
CAUTION!
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could should be checked monthly when cold and
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
H, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle 4
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
remains on the H, and you hear a chime, turn the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
engine OFF immediately and call for service.
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires).
WARNING!
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
hood yourself, refer to Maintaining Your Vehicle
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
Pressure Cap paragraph.
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
the vehicles handling and stopping ability. TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
to continue to function properly.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
CAUTION!
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not The TPMS has been optimized for the original
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the warning have been established for the tire size
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
approximately one minute and then remain continuously tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- placement equipment that is not of the same size,
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or (Continued)
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your Light in the instrument cluster will come on
sensor function checked. when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the 4
18. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
Light If Equipped dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
trol (ESC) is off.
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
With Drive Modes the ESC OFF indicator will (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
be lit any time the Traction modes is set to Sport, Track or your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
Full OFF. problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE: DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC The Driver Information Display (DID) features an inter-
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light will come active display which is located in the instrument cluster.
on momentarily each time the ignition switch is
turned to ON/RUN.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
Driver Information Display (DID) Display

This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The The system allows the driver to select information by
DID Menu Items consists of the following: pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Performance 4
Driver Assist If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
DID Controls
Diagnostics If Equipped
Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) If Equipped
Up And Down Arrow Buttons: NOTE:
Using the Up or Down arrows allows you to Holding the Up/Down or Left/Right arrow buttons
cycle through the Main Menu Items. will loop the user through the currently selected menu
or options presented on the screen.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area. Main menu and submenus wrap for continuous
scrolling.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
Left And Right Arrow Buttons: screen viewed within that main menu will be dis-
played.
Using the Left or Right arrow buttons allows
you to cycle through the submenu items of the OK Button:
Main menu item. For Digital Speedometer
Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h).
For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings:
OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
Within each submenu layer, the Up/Down arrows will chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
allow the user to select the item of interest. change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
driving style.
the 1st page of the submenu).
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each 4
Pushing the Left arrow button will exit each submenu time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
layer and return to the main menu. turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Perfor- OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
mance Timers): performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK
button. Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Engine Oil Life Reset 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
Oil Change Required
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the procedure(s):
OFF/LOCK position.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
downward through the main menu to Vehicle Info.
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life Screen
3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access
In The DID And Holding Ok
the Oil Life screen.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
4. Push and hold the OK button until the Oil Life
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message
screen displays.
will flash in the DID display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the 5. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to select
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change Yes, then push and release the OK button to select
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the reset of the Oil Life.
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style. 6. Push and release the UP arrow button to exit the
submenu screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you DID Yellow Telltales
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. tales. These telltales include:
Cruise Control Service Forward Collision Warming If Equipped
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell- This light warns the driver of a potential colli-
tales. These telltales include: 4
sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the
Cruise Ready driver to take action in order to avoid the
collision. Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control
This telltale will illuminate white to indicate
(ACC) in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
that the Adaptive Cruise Control system is
hicle for further information.
activated.
Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-
This telltale will illuminate green when the shield washer fluid is low.
electronic speed control is SET. Refer to Elec-
tronic Speed Control in Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle for further
information.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control If Equipped DID Red Telltales
This light will turn on when a ACC is not This area will show reconfigurable red caution telltales.
operating and needs service. Refer to Adap- These telltales include:
tive Cruise Control (ACC) in Understanding Power Steering System Over Temperature If
The Features Of Your Vehicle for further Equipped
information.
If the SERVICE POWER STEERING message
LaneSense Failure Telltale and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs
LaneSense Departure has detected a failure. to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely
the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to
Power Steering in Starting And Operating for further
Service AWD Indicator information.
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
NOTE: Oil Pressure Warning Light
Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera- This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
and during parking maneuvers. chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns 4
on.
If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
Door Ajar This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
Charging System Light
more doors may be ajar.
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while
Decklid Ajar
driving, turn off some of the vehicles non-essential
This light will turn on to indicate the decklid electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
may be ajar. the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
system. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an au- vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
thorized dealer. rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
Emergencies if jump starting is required.
elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light may require towing.
This light informs you of a problem with the Oil Temperature Warning Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
light will come on when the ignition is first
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
possible.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-
WARNING!
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to Occupant
Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Vehicle for further information. Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
Transmission Temperature Warning Light nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
cause a fire. 4
mission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high DID Selectable Menu Items
torque converter slip condition. If this light comes on, Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.
the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
CAUTION! Speedometer
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- Push and release the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause toggle between the Speedometer display type.
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Vehicle Info Engine Torque
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Engine Power
the Vehicle Info menu is highlighted in the DID. Push and
Performance Features
release the RIGHT arrow buttons to enter the submenu
items of Vehicle Info. Follow the directional prompts to
access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu WARNING!
items: Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
Tire Pressure Monitor mance Features is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public
Coolant Temp roadways. It is recommended that these features be
Trans Temp used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
Oil Temp measured by the performance pages must never be
Oil Pressure exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of
Oil Life others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
Battery Voltage prevent accidents.
Intake Air Temp

Refer to Driver Information Display (DID) in Under- Last
standing Your Instrument Panel for Main Menu/Sub- Current
Menu selectable items and navigation. Reaction Timer
The Performance Features include the following: 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer Best
4
Best Last
Last Current
Current Reaction Timer
Reaction Timer Braking Distance
0-100 mph (0-161 km/h) Timer Distance
Best From Speed
Last Current G-Forces
Current
Peak G-Forces
Reaction Timer
Lap Timer
1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
Best Lap History
Will list the last 5 lap with the best lap highlighted 0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h)
in green. When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
Top Speed the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h)
within 20 seconds.
The following describes each feature and its operation:
The feature will ready when the vehicle speed is at
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) 0 mph (0 km/h). The word READY will flash when
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for conditions are met for the event to begin.
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to
10 seconds.
100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) in less then 20 seconds.
The feature will ready when the vehicle speed is at
To clear the vehicles best, last and current 0 to
0 mph (0 km/h). The word READY will flash when
100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) time, push and hold the OK
conditions are met for the event to begin.
button for two seconds.
Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
1/8 Mile (200 Meters)
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
To clear the vehicles best, last, and current 0-60 mph vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within 15 seconds and the
(0-100 km/h) time, push and hold the OK button for vehicles speed when it reaches 1/8 mile.
two seconds.
The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph To clear the vehicles best 1/4 mile 400 meters) run,
(0 km/h). The word READY will flash when condi- push and hold the OK button for two seconds.
tions are met for the event to begin.
Braking Distance
Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 When selected, this screen displays the vehicles braking
mile (200 meters) in less then 15 seconds.
distance, and the speed at which the brake pedal was
To clear the vehicles best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run, pushed. 4
push and hold the OK button for five seconds. This feature will only function when applying the
1/4 Mile (400 Meters) brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within 25 seconds and the
The word READY will display when conditions are
vehicles speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (200 meters).
met for the event to begin.
The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph
The distance and speed measurements display while
(0 km/h). The word READY will flash when condi-
the event is taking place.
tions are met for the event to begin.
The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com-
mile (400 meters) in less then 25 seconds.
plete stop.
Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the Lap Timer
current and last run values.
When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer
Current G-Force always at 0:00.00 with the previous Best and Last time
data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
(lateral and longitudinal) that displays the directions of Pushing OK will start current timer from 0:00.0.
the forces.
When OK is pushed, the times are updated accord-
Peak G-Force ingly.
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the
values (two lateral and two longitudinal). current timer will stop and the time will be reset to
0:00.00.
When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the cur-
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display. rent timer will reset to 0:00.0 when ignition is placed
in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON
Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force
values. position (or will roll over at 59:59.99 if ever possible).
Each time the driver pushes OK for a Lap that current
time populates, the Last time and also populates the
1st (top) space on the Timer History page the current Top Speed
time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button. When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since
The timer will stop when the driver navigates away last reset:
from this page. Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every
Lap History time that speed is exceeded that number is stored here
unless/until the driver resets the screen. 4
When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and
will color highlight the time that is the best time from the Latching over ignition cycles.
Timer Page.
Units will change with the global change in units.
Each time the driver pushes the OK button (while on
Driver Assist If Equipped
the Lap Timer page) the current Lap Time populates
the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Color will indicate the time that is the best time from The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
the Timer Page. information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Holding the OK button only resets the page you are
on.
Lap History page is a static display of lap times only.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the DID:
Distance Setting Change
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read Adap-
Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.
System Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
ACC Proximity Warning
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read Adaptive Cruise ACC Unavailable Warning
Control Ready.
The DID will return to the last display selected after
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering five seconds of no ACC display activity.
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
For further information, refer to Adaptive Cruise Con-
ACC SET trol (ACC) If Equipped in Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
LaneSense If Equipped Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys- Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.
tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
Trip Info
further information, refer to LaneSense If Equipped
in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle. Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until 4
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left
Fuel Economy
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until will display the following:
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID.
Distance
Two sub menu pages one with Current value dis-
Average Fuel Economy
played and one without the Current Value displayed:
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l) Elapsed Time
Range To Empty (miles or km) Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
Audio Diagnostics If Equipped
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Audio Menu displays in the DID. the diagnostic Menu is selected. Then, the Driver is able
to view engine and emission vehicle faults.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Push OK to have the most recent fault code sent.
the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This There is a delay when the next diagnostic code is
feature shows the number of stored warning messages. requested during which the following message is
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see displayed:
what the stored messages are.
Checking System for Diagnostic Codes.
Screen Setup
Driver must push the OK button again to see the next
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Pcode otherwise current message remains displayed.
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and
release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
that information is displayed.
Driver exits when they cycle to another submenu (up Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) If Equipped
or down). The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on
Faults are displayed from newest to the oldest. vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle
with automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The
If the menu is exited before the end of codes is reached PSI provides the driver with a visual indication within
- when the driver re-enters the list will be restarted the DID display when the driver configured gear shift
from the beginning. 4
point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating.
When no codes are present or the last code is reached This indication notifies the driver to change gear corre-
= (P0000) and this message is displayed: sponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit. When
the shift up indicator is shown on the display, the PSI is
No Further or End of Diagnostic Codes. advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
The PSI indicator in the DID display remains illuminated
until the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions
return to a situation where changing gear is not required,
corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit.
Uconnect SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On

Faceplate
1 Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the 4
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Touchscreen And
Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the
Buttons On Faceplate
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
1 Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,
Uconnect display. select the preferred setting. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow/Done button on the touch-
Customer Programmable Features Uconnect screen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the
5.0 Settings previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to
Push the + MORE button on the faceplate and then press close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system to toggle up or down through the available settings.
allows you to access programmable features that may be Display
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety/
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort &
the following settings will be available:
Remote Start, Engine Off Options, Compass Settings,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Set- Display Mode
tings, Clear Personal Data and System Information. When in this display you may select the Auto or Manual
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
time. lease the Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
Set Language Units
When in this display, you may select one of multiple After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen you
languages (English/Franais/Espaol) for all display no- may select each unit of measure independently displayed
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga- in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
tion system (if equipped). Press the Language button system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
on the touchscreen and select from English, Franais, measure are listed below: 4
or Espaol. Press the back arrow/Done button on the Speed
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Select from: MPH or km/h.
Touchscreen Beep
Distance
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. To Select from: mi or km.
change the Mode status, press and release the On or Fuel Consumption
Off button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/
Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous Select from: MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km or
menu. km/L.
Pressure
Select from: psi, kPa, or bar.
Temperature release the Brief or Long button on the touchscreen.
Select from: C, or F.
Power
Show Command List
Select from: HP (US), HP (UK), and kW.
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
Torque mand List settings. To change the mode status, press and
release the Always, With Help, or Never button on
Select from: lb-ft or Nm.
the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on
After the desired setting has been selected, press the back the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
Clock & Date
previous menu.
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touch-
Voice
screen the following settings will be available:
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen the
Set Time
following settings will be available:
Voice Response Length When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the Set Time button then choose from
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re- a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the corresponding
sponse Length settings. To change mode status, press and arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
select AM or PM. Press the back arrow/Done button Safety/Assistance
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the
Show Time Status touchscreen the following settings will be available:
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the Forward Collision Warning If Equipped
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
Status setting press the Show Time Status button on the 4
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
touchscreen and select from ON or OFF. Press the collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
the previous menu. means the system will warn you of a possible collision
Set Date with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
When in this display, you may set the date manually. the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
Press the Set Date button on the touchscreen then press setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
the corresponding arrows above and below the current are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
date to adjust. Press the back arrow/Done button on the the FCW status, press and release the Near or Far
touchscreen to return to the previous menu. button. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
For further information, refer to Adaptive Cruise Con- in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18
trol (ACC) in Understanding The Features Of Your km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to
Vehicle. indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be
enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To
Steering Feel Options If Equipped
change the ParkSense status, press and release the
When your vehicle is not equipped with Performance Sound Only or Sound and Display button. Then
Control, the Steering Feel Options feature will allow you press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen.
to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the Sport Refer to ParkSense in Understanding The Features
button on the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating
of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering information.
effort. Press the Normal button on the touchscreen to
Rear ParkSense Chime Volume
provide greater steering feel, requiring greater steering
effort. Press the Comfort button on the touchscreen to The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be
provide a balance of steering feel and steering effort. selected from the DID or Uconnect System if
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
return to the previous menu. MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the Rear
ParkSense
ParkSense Volume button on the touchscreen, then
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the select from Low, Med, or High. Press the back
vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
previous menu. ParkSense will retain its last known the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
configuration state through ignition cycles. not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
Blind Spot Alert
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature in the BSM not operating to specification.
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects 4
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera dis-
Lights & Chime mode is activated, the Blind Spot Moni- play whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into
tor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. touchscreen display along with a caution note to check
When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) entire surroundings across the top of the screen. After five
system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert seconds, this note will disappear. To enable or disable,
status, press the Off, Lights, or Lights & Chime press the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
button on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow/ button on the touchscreen, and select On or Off. Press
Done button on the touchscreen. the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the on the windshield. To enable or disable, press the Rain
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay Sensing button on the touchscreen, and select On or
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines Off. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of screen to return to the previous menu.
REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds Hill Start Assist If Equipped
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the Controls system is active. Refer to Electronic Brake Control
button on the touchscreen, the settings button on the System in Starting And Operating for system function
touchscreen, then the Safety & Assistance button on the and operating information. To enable or disable, press the
touchscreen. Press the Parkview Backup camera Delay Hill Start Assist button on the touchscreen, and select
button on the touchscreen and select from ON or On or Off. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
OFF. touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights press the Illuminated Approach button on the touch-
screen and choose either 0, 30, 60, or 90 buttons
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen,
on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
the following settings will be available:
Headlight Off Delay return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of Headlights With Wipers If Equipped 4
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
setting, press the Headlight Off Delay button on the in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
touchscreen and choose either 0, 30, 60, or 90 proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
interval. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch- turned off, if they were turned on by this feature. To
screen to return to the previous menu. make your selection, press the Lights w/Wipers button
and select from On or Off. Press the back arrow/
Headlight Illumination On Approach Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of menu.
the amount of time the headlights remain on when the
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
Auto Dim High Beams If Equipped Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con- when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
ditions. To make your selection, press the Auto High Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
Beams button on the touchscreen, and select from On selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
or Off. Press the back arrow/Done button on the selected. To make your selection, press the Flash Lights
touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Refer to w/Lock button on the touchscreen, and select from
Automatic High Beam If Equipped in Understand- On or Off. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further informa- touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
tion.
Doors & Locks
Daytime Running Lights If Equipped
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touch-
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on screen, the following settings will be available:
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, Auto Unlock On Exit
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch-
screen, and select from On or Off. Press the back When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
previous menu. NEUTRAL position and the drivers door is opened. To
make your selection, press the Auto Unlock On Exit
button on the touchscreen and select from On or Off. Remote Door Unlock
This feature will allow you to program your remote door
locks to open All doors or only the Driver door with
Sound Horn With Lock the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle. To
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
make your selection, press the Remote Door Unlock 4
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press the Horn w/Lock Button and choose Off, 1st button on the touchscreen and choose from All or
Driver. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
Press or 2nd Press. Press the back arrow/Done button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Sound Horn With Remote Start NOTE: If Driver Door is selected, the (RKE) transmitter
will have to be pushed two times in order to unlock all
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when doors.
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
Passive Entry
press the Horn w/Remote Start button on the touch-
screen and select from On or Off. Press the back This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
previous menu. (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. It automatically
unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is
grabbed. To make your selection, press the Passive Auto Comfort Systems If Equipped
Entry button on the touchscreen and select from On or After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
Off. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch- button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
screen to return to the previous menu. Refer to Keyless available:
Enter-N-Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle for further information. Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped
Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected the drivers heated seat and
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote temperatures are below 40 F (4.4 C). When tempera-
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be tures are above 80 F (26.7 C) the driver vented seat will
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature turn ON. To make your selection, press the Auto Heated
selected. To make your selection, press the Flash Lights Seats button on the touchscreen then select either Off,
w/Lock button on the touchscreen, and select from Remote Start or All Starts. Press the back arrow/
On or Off. Press the back arrow/Done button on the Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
touchscreen to return to the previous menu. menu.
Engine Off Options 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the Engine Off
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
Power Delay button and select from 0 seconds, 45
Headlight Off Delay seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes buttons on the
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
4
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Compass Settings If Equipped
Delay status press the Headlight Off Delay button on
the touchscreen and select from 0, 30, 60, or 90 After pressing the Compass Settings button on the
buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time touchscreen the following settings will be available:
interval. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch- Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
Engine Off Power Delay North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
When this feature is selected, the power window
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the Perform Compass Calibration
instrument panel, such as iPods, Mobile Phones, Lap-
Press the Calibration button on the touchscreen to
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass.
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass
by pressing the ON button on the touchscreen and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will
now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
Compass Variance Map
arrows to adjust, tap the C icon to readjust to the center. Surround Sound If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the Surround Sound
Equalizer button on the touchscreen, select On or Off. Press the
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
the previous menu. 4
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on AUX Volume Offset If Equipped
the scale between the + and buttons on the
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Offset
Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen, select On or Off. Press the
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
the previous menu.
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touch- Loudness If Equipped
screen and select from Off, 1, 2 or 3 buttons on
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on
To make your selection, press the Loudness button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
the touchscreen, select On or Off. Press the back SiriusXM Setup If Equipped
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the After pressing the SiriusXM Setup button on the touch-
previous menu. screen, the following settings will be available:
Phone/Bluetooth Channel Skip
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth button on the SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
touchscreen the following settings will be available: channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
Paired Phones exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
followed by pressing the back arrow/Done button on the
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
touchscreen.
Paired Audio Sources
Subscription Information
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen sure you want to reset your settings to default? select
to access the Subscription Information screen. Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Press back arrow/
Done button to return to the previous menu.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on Clear Personal Data
the screen or visit the provider online. After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings button
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- 4
and is available for U.S. residents only. able:
Clear Personal Data
Restore Settings When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To re-
touchscreen the following settings will be available: move all personal information, press the Clear Personal
Data button and select from Yes or No. If Yes is
Restore Settings
selected a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, want to clear all personal data? select Yes to Clear, or
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. Cancel to exit. Press the back arrow/Done button on
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Restore Settings button and select from Yes or No.
If Yes is selected a pop-up will appear asking Are you
Customer Programmable Features Uconnect When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
8.4 Settings screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,
Press the Apps, or the Controls, button on the press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
touchscreen, then press the Settings button on the appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back
mode the Uconnect system allows you to access pro- Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
grammable features that may be equipped such as Dis- menu, or press the X button on the touchscreen to close
play, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle
Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, up or down through the available settings.
SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data Display
and System Information.
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen
NOTE: the following settings will be available:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time. Display Mode
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings When in this display you may select one of the auto
may vary. display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
lease the Manual or Auto button on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and
even though the headlights are on.
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
Display Brightness With Headlights ON point on the scale between the + and buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the 4
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and touchscreen.
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with
point on the scale between the + and buttons on the Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or
touchscreen. parade positions.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Set Theme If Equipped
Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and
This feature will allow you to choose a theme for the
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or
display screen. The theme will change the background
parade positions.
color, highlight color, and button color of the display
screen.
Set Language Control Screen Time-Out If Equipped
When in this display, you may select one of multiple When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
languages (English / Franais / Espaol) for all display stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi- With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
gation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lan- Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
guage button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
appears next to the language, showing that setting has selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch- to return to the previous menu.
screen to return to the previous menu. Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster If Equipped
Touchscreen Beep
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the designated turn within a programmed route. To make
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the Touchscreen Beep your selection, press the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears Cluster button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se- appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
return to the previous menu. to return to the previous menu.
Units Temperature
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen you Select from: C, or F.
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
Power
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of Select from: HP (US), HP (UK), and kW.
measure are listed below: Torque 4
Speed
Select from: lb-ft or Nm.
Select from: MPH or km/h.
After the desired setting has been selected, press the back
Distance arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
Select from: mi or km. previous menu.
Fuel Consumption Voice
Select from: MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km or After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen the
km/L. following settings will be available:
Voice Response Length
Pressure
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
Select from: psi, kPa, or bar.
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the Brief or Detailed button on the Clock
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the following settings will be available:
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. Sync Time With GPS
Show Command List This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
When in this display, you may change the Show Com- the Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen until
mand List settings. To change the Show Command List a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
settings, press the Always, With Help or Never setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to Set Time Hours
return to the previous menu. This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync
time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the + or
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
Set Time Minutes Status setting press the Show Time in Status Bar button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
unchecked. To make your selection, press the + or
previous menu or press the X button on the touch-
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
screen to close out of the settings screen.
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to 4
return to the previous menu. Safety & Driving Assistance
Time Format After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
This feature will allow you to select the time format
able:
display setting. Press the Time Format button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs Forward Collision Warning If Equipped
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected. The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
to the previous menu. collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Show Time In Status Bar If Equipped Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you touchscreen to return to the previous menu. For further
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change information, refer to Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
the FCW status, press and release the Near or Far With Mitigation in Understanding The Features Of
button. Then press the back arrow button on the touch- Your Vehicle.
screen. LaneSense Warning If Equipped
For further information, refer to Adaptive Cruise Con- When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
trol (ACC) in Understanding The Features Of Your the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
Vehicle. lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking provide either an Early, Medium, or Late warning
zone start point.
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional For further information, refer to LaneSense Warning
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient (LDW) in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The hicle.
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make LaneSense Strength If Equipped
your selection, press the Forward Collision Warning
Active Braking button on the touchscreen, until a check- When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can ParkSense
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
departure can be set at Low, Medium or High.
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
For further information, refer to Lane Departure Warn- and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
ing (LDW) in Understanding The Features Of Your will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
Vehicle. the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled 4
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
Steering Feel Options If Equipped
ParkSense status, press and release the Sound Only
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust or Sound and Display button. Then press the back
the steering effort and feel. Press the Sport button on arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to ParkSense
the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steer- in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for
ing feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort. system function and operating information.
Press the Normal button on the touchscreen to provide
Front ParkSense Volume
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort.
Press the Comfort button on the touchscreen to provide The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be
a balance of steering feel and steering effort. Press the selected from the DID or Uconnect System. The chime
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
previous menu. factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make
your selection, press the Front ParkSense Vol. button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
to the previous menu. ParkSense will retain its last
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
Rear ParkSense Volume previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the Tilt Side
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be
Mirrors in Reverse button on the touchscreen, until a
selected from the DID or Uconnect System. The chime
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
your selection, press the Rear ParkSense Vol. button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to Blind Spot Alert
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
to the previous menu. ParkSense will retain its last
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When Lights & Chime mode is activated, the Blind display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn display along with a caution note to check entire sur-
signal is on. When Off is selected, the Blind Spot roundings across the top of the screen. After five sec-
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
Blind Spot Alert status, press the Off, Lights or press the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Lights & Chime button on the touchscreen. Then press button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears 4
the back arrow button on the touchscreen. next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
to return to the previous menu.
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. ParkView Backup Camera Delay
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
in the BSM not operating to specification. the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into Hill Start Assist If Equipped
PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the
system is active. Refer to Electronic Brake Control
Controls button on the touchscreen, the settings
System in Starting And Operating for system function
button on the touchscreen, then the Safety & Driving
and operating information. To make your selection, press
Assistance button on the touchscreen. Press the
the Hill Start Assist button on the touchscreen, until a
Parkview Backup Camera Delay button on the touch-
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
screen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the system will automati- Lights
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
following settings will be available.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers button on the touchscreen,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that Headlight Off Delay
the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the + or - button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers but-
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
back button on the faceplate. to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate faceplate. 4
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
Auto Dim High Beams If Equipped
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
press the + or - button on the touchscreen to select will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button ditions. To make your selection, press the Auto High
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or Beams button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
push the back button on the faceplate. appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
Headlights With Wipers If Equipped
screen to return to the previous menu, or push the back
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is button on the faceplate. Refer to Lights If Equipped
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap- in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. further information.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
Daytime Running Lights If Equipped selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
on the faceplate.
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch- Doors & Locks
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi- After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touch-
cating that the setting has been selected. Press the back screen the following settings will be available:
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Auto Unlock On Exit
Flash Lights With Lock When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash NEUTRAL position and the drivers door is opened. To
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote make your selection, press the Auto Unlock On Exit
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
make your selection, press the Flash Lights with Lock to return to the previous menu.
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
Flash Lights With Lock setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
previous menu.
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the Sound Horn With Remote Start
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To the remote start is activated. To make your selection, 4
make your selection, press the Flash Lights with Lock press the Sound Horn with Remote Start button on the
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
to return to the previous menu. menu.
Sound Horn With Lock 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when When Driver Door is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
the door locks are activated. To make your selection, Unlocks, only the drivers door will unlock with the first
press either the Off, 1st Press, or 2nd Press button press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passengers doors.
When All Doors is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob (RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the your selection, press the Passive Entry button on the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Press
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
Unlocks All Doors, all doors will unlock no matter
previous menu. Refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go in
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door is pro-
grammed, only the drivers door will unlock when the Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off If
drivers door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Equipped
Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door is programmed, This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
touching the handle more than once will only result in stored to a memory location (drivers seat, exterior
the drivers door opening. If Driver Door is selected, mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/ sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
RKE transmitter). Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob button on the
Passive Entry touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous turn ON. To make your selection, press the Auto-On
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start button to select from Off, Remote Start
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
or All Starts until a check-mark appears next to setting,
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to Driver Memory 4
menu.
Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle
for further information. Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
Auto Comfort Systems If Equipped touchscreen the following settings will be available:
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort button on the Easy Exit Seat If Equipped
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
When this feature is selected, the Drivers seat will
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped
To make your selection, press the Easy Exit Seat button
When this feature is selected the drivers heated seat and on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
temperatures are below 40 F (4.4 C). When tempera- back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
tures are above 80 F (26.7 C) the driver vented seat will previous menu.
Engine Off Power Delay select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped), Audio
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to following settings will be available.
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the Balance/Fade
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the + or - This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
interval, and choose from 0 seconds, 45 seconds, 5 to adjust, or tap the C icon to readjust to the center. Press
minutes or 10 minutes. Press the back arrow button the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. previous menu.
Headlight Off Delay Equalizer
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when settings. Adjust the settings with the + and setting
exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
status press the + or button on the touchscreen to
the scale between the + and buttons on the AUX Volume Offset If Equipped
touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press button on the touchscreen, choose a level from 3 to +3.
directly on the desired setting. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return 4
to the previous menu.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Loudness If Equipped
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
press the Off, 1, 2 or 3 button on the touchscreen. make your selection, press the Loudness button on the
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return touchscreen, then choose Yes or No. Press the back
to the previous menu. arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
Surround Sound If Equipped menu.
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To
make your selection, press the Surround Sound button
on the touchscreen, select On or Off. Press the back
menu.
Phone/Bluetooth undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selec-
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth button on the tion, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen,
touchscreen the following settings will be available: select the channels you would like to skip followed by
pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
Paired Phones
Subscription Information
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual. limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
Paired Audio Sources services, it will be necessary to access the information on
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual. to access the Subscription Information screen.
SiriusXM Setup If Equipped Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
After pressing the SiriusXM Setup button on the touch- reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
screen, the following settings will be available: the screen or visit the provider online.
Channel Skip NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of and is available for U.S. residents only.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
Restore Settings Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings button
touchscreen the following settings will be available: on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
Restore Settings able:
Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
4
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking personal information, press the Clear Personal Data
Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default? button and a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure
select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Once the you want to clear all personal data? select OK to
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating settings Clear, or Cancel to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
reset to default. Press the okay button on the touchscreen a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared. Press
to exit. the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
System Information
WARNING!
After pressing the System Information button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available: Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
System Information use only and should not be done on any public
When System Information is selected, a System Informa- roadways. It is recommended that these features be
tion screen will appear displaying the system software used in a controlled environment and within the
version. limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
Performance Pages If Equipped exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
Performance Pages is an application that provides a can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of
display for performance indicators, as received from the others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
Instrument Cluster, that will help you gain familiarity prevent accidents.
with the capabilities of your vehicle in real-time.
The Performance Pages include the following:
To access the Performance Pages, press the Apps
button on the touchscreen then press the Performance Home
Pages button on the touchscreen. Press the desired Timers
button on the touchscreen to access that specific Perfor-
mance Page. Gauges 1
Gauges 2 When Home is selected, the following options will be
G-Force available:
Engine A series of six images which can be selected by the

The following describes each feature and its operation: user.
Home A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll
through vehicle images. 4
A short-cut to the Performance Control feature.
Performance Pages Home

Timers When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to
select from following Tickets:
Current
Pressing the Current button displays a real time
summary of performance timers.
Last
Pressing the Last button displays the last recorded run
of performance timers.
Best
Pressing the Best button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
Performance Pages Timers
Save With a USB jump drive installed, press the USB
button to save to the jump drive.
Pressing the Save button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run With an SD Card installed, press the SD Card to save
for Uconnect System storage. The operation of the Save runs to the SD Card.
feature is listed below:
Press the Uconnect button to save the runs to the
Owner web page. 4
Press the Cancel button to view the last timer

Ticket.
The Tickets contain the timers listed below:
Reaction Time
Measures the drivers reaction time for launching the
vehicle against a simulated a drag strip timing light
(behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID).
Performance Pages Save NOTE: The Reaction Time, MPH, and Mile timers
will be ready when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h)
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Brake Distance
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h). stop.
0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h) NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released or the parking brake is engaged,
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h). before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
Brake Speed
Mile (200 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an mile Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
(200 meters). brake pedal is depressed.
Mile (400 meter) NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only dis-
play ready when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an mile MPH (48 km/h).
(400 meters).
Gauges 1 When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure. 4
Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
Performance Pages Gauges 1

Gauges 2
Performance Pages Gauges 2 (Manual Transmission)

When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Performance Pages Gauges 2 (Automatic Battery Voltage
Transmission)
Shows the actual battery voltage.
Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
Only) values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
Shows the actual transmission temperature.
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
G-Force
available:
Lateral G-Force Left and Right 4
The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right
force of the vehicle.
Longitudinal G-Force Fore and Aft
The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and
braking force of the vehicle.
Peak G-Forces Fore Aft, Left and Right
This shows the maximum g-forces that have been
achieved since the last reset from the DID. Peak values
are maintained through ignition cycles by the DID until
Performance Pages G-Force they are cleared by the driver.
Vehicle Speed Engine
Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle
in either mph or km/h, starting at 0 with no maximum
value.
Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
Performance Pages Engine

When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts driving behavior desired. The Performance Control fea-
ture is controlled through the Uconnect radio and may
Shows the instantaneous horsepower.
be accessed by performing any of the following:
Instantaneous Torque
Pushing the Super Track Pack button on the instru-
Shows the instantaneous torque. ment panel switch bank.
Oil Pressure Selecting Performance Control from the Apps 4
Shows the actual engine oil pressure. menu.
Gear (Automatic Transmission Only) Selecting Performance Control from within the Per-
formance Pages menu.
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle. You will be able to enable, disable, and customize the
functionality of the Launch Control and Drive Mode
Performance Control If Equipped Set-Up features within Performance Control.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Performance Control Descriptions of these features are provided below. To
feature which allows for coordinating the operation of access information about the functionality of these fea-
various vehicle systems depending upon the type of tures through the Uconnect system, press the Info
button on the touchscreen.
Launch Mode
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can Launch Control
prevent accidents. This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The Automatic Transmission If Equipped
system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
Launch Control is only available when the following
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this procedure is followed:
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions
may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems1. Press the Apps button on the touchscreen, select
control resulting in an aborted launch. Performance Control, and press the Launch Con-
trol button on the touchscreen or push the Super 4
NOTE:
Track Pak button on the integrated center stack switch
Launch control should not be used on public roads. bank.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding 2. If desired, press the Launch RPM Set-Up button on
area. the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust
Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles your launch RPM for optimum launch/traction. To
of the vehicles life. adjust the Launch RPM, press and drag the slider bar,
or press the arrows on the touchscreen, to adjust the
Launch Control should only be used when the engine
holding RPM. Press the back arrow button on the
and transmission are at operating temperature. touchscreen when finished. The setting will be saved.
Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved road
surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces may cause
damage to vehicle components and is not recommended.
NOTE: The default RPM for launch control is a preset NOTE: Messages will appear in the Driver Information
factory value. Optimal launch RPM will depend on the Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the
engine and tires on the vehicle, as well as the road and above conditions have not been met.
weather conditions. Not all RPM settings will be usable
7. When conditions four through six have been met, the
in all configurations and scenarios. If requested launch
DID will read Launch Ready Release Brake. Release
RPM is not attainable in a given scenario, the engine will
the brake and continue to hold wide open throttle to
provide the maximum amount of torque possible to get
launch.
as close as possible to the requested RPM.
8. Keep the vehicle pointed straight. Launch Control will
3. Press the Activate Launch Mode button on the
be active until the vehicle reaches 62 MPH (100 km/h).
touchscreen.
Launch Control will abort before launch completion and
4. Ensure the vehicle is not moving and the steering
display Launch Aborted in the DID for any the follow-
wheel is pointing straight.
ing conditions:
5. Hold the brake pedal and verify the vehicle is in
The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
Drive.
The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
6. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator
moving in a straight line.
pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will hold at
the RPM that was set in the Launch RPM Set-up screen.
The ESC OFF button is pressed to change the system NOTE: The default for launch control is 3000 RPM.
to another mode if Launch Control is enabled. Optimal launch RPM will depend on the engine and tires
on the vehicle, as well as road and weather conditions.
NOTE: Launch mode is not available within the first 500
Not all RPM settings will be usable in all configurations
miles of engine break-in.
and scenarios. If requested launch RPM is not attainable
Manual Transmission If Equipped in a given scenario, the engine will provide the maximum
4
Launch Control is only available when the following amount of torque possible to get as close as possible to
procedure is followed: the requested RPM.
1. Press the Apps button on the touchscreen, select 3. Press the Activate Launch Mode button on the
Performance Control, and press the Launch Control touchscreen.
button on the touchscreen or push the Super Track Pak 4. Ensure the vehicle is not moving and the steering
button on the center stack switch bank. wheel is pointing straight.
2. Press the Launch RPM Set-Up button on the touch- 5. Fully depress the clutch pedal and verify the vehicle is
screen. This screen will allow you to adjust your launch in first gear.
RPM for optimum launch/traction. To adjust the
Launch RPM, press and drag the slider bar or press the
arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding RPM.
Press the back arrow button when finished. The setting
will be saved.
6. While holding the clutch depressed, rapidly apply the Launch Control will abort before launch completion and
accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The engine display Launch Aborted in the DID for any the follow-
speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the Launch ing conditions:
RPM Set-up screen.
The brake is applied during launch.
NOTE: Messages will appear in the Driver Information
The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the
moving in a straight line.
above conditions have not been met.
The ESC OFF button is pressed to change the ESC
7. When conditions four through six have been met, the
system to another mode if Launch Control is enabled.
DID will read Launch Ready Release Clutch. Re-
lease the clutch quickly and continue to hold wide NOTE: Launch mode is not available within the first 500
open throttle to launch. Execute shifts as described in miles of engine break-in.
the section Manual Transmission Shifting.
NOTE: Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels
8. Keep the vehicle pointed straight. Launch control will are spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
be active until the vehicle reaches 62 MPH (100 km/h). transmission may occur.
Drive Mode Set-Up Pressing the Drive Mode Set-Up button on the touch-
screen within the Performance Control screen indicates
the real-time status of the various systems. Pressing the
Sport Mode Set-Up or Default Mode Set-Up buttons
on the touchscreen, the driver can configure their indi-
vidual drive modes and see how those configurations
affect the performance of the vehicle. 4
NOTE: Not all of the options listed in this manual are

available on every vehicle, below is a chart with all
available Drive Mode vehicle configurations.
Drive Mode Set-Up

Available Mode Configurations
Transmission Engine Engine/Trans Steering Paddle Shifters Traction Control
Auto N/A X X X X
Manual X N/A X N/A X
Refer to the Sport and Default modes for their detailed Default Mode
operation.
NOTE: These settings will remain in effect when using
the Launch Control feature.
Default Mode
The vehicle will always start in Default Mode. This mode
is for typical driving conditions. While in Default Mode,
the Engine, Transmission and Traction will operate in
their Normal settings and cannot be changed. The Steer-
ing assist may be configured to Normal, Sport, or Com-
fort by pressing the corresponding buttons on the touch-
screen. The Paddle Shifters may be enabled or disabled 4
while in this mode.
Default Mode Set-Up

Sport Mode Any of these four settings may be changed to the drivers
preferences by pressing the buttons on the touchscreen.
Push the Sport button on the instrument panel switch
bank to put the vehicle in Sport Mode and activate these
settings. The customized settings will only be active
when the Sport button is active.
Sport Mode
Sport Mode is a configuration set-up for typical enthusi-
ast driving. The Transmission and Steering are both set to
their Sport settings. The steering wheel paddle switches
are enabled. The Traction Control defaults to Normal. Sport Mode Set-Up
Possible Drive Mode configurations are listed below with Engine
accompanying descriptions. The information contained
in the list below can also be accessed from within the
mode Set-Up menus. To access the information, press the
Info button on the touchscreen from the mode Set-Up
menu, and use the left/right arrows to toggle through
available descriptions. The title for each system in the 4
Set-Up menu can be pressed, which provides the descrip-
tions for each function of that system.
Engine
Sport
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen for improved
throttle response for an enhanced driving experience.
Normal Sport
Press the Norm button on the touchscreen for standard Press the Sport button on the touchscreen for improved
throttle response for normal driving. throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced
driving experience.
Engine/Trans
Normal
Press the Norm button on the touchscreen for a balance
of throttle response, shift comfort and economy for
normal driving.
Engine/Trans
Paddle Shifters ON
Press the ON button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
OFF
Press the OFF button on the touchscreen to disable 4
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
Paddle Shifters
Traction SPORT
Press the SPORT button on the touchscreen to turn off
traction control and reduce stability control.
NORMAL
Press the NORM button on the touchscreen to provide
full traction control and full stability control.
Traction Control
Steering Normal
Press the Norm button on the touchscreen to provide
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort.
Comfort
Press the Comf button on the touchscreen to provide a 4
balance of steering feel and steering effort.
Uconnect RADIOS IF EQUIPPED

For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED

Steering This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
Sport plugged into the USB port.
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to provide Located in the front storage area of the center console,
the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest this feature allows an iPod/MP3 player, or an external
amount of steering effort. USB device, to be connected to the audio system.
may not fully support the iPod control features. Please
visit Apples website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Users
Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF

EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
USB/AUX/SD Card Ports

1 Aux Jack 3 SD Card
2 USB Port
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod

and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/AUX
etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in. 4
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
Wheel) will Seek down for the next listenable station.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
grammed in the radio preset button.
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Media Mode down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the selected media (AUX, Bluetooth, SD Card). Regulatory And Safety Information
Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the
USA/CANADA
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the
previous track if it is within eight seconds after the Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
current track begins to play. The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nev-
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. ertheless, the wireless radio shall be used in such a manner
that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated community.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the an- is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or NOTE:
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
before turning on the wireless radio.
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). ference in a residential installation. This equipment 4
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
2. This device must accept any interference received, in- communications. However, there is no guarantee that
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation. interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. radio or television reception, which can be determined
Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage more of the following measures:
radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible
den compromettre le fonctionnement. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician General Overview
for help. Buttons On The Faceplate
CLIMATE CONTROLS The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to Uconnect screen.
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect system dis-
play.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Ra-
dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Automatic Climate Controls Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls

Buttons On The Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls
Buttons On The Touchscreen 1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to 5. Front Defrost Button
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
will turn off.
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
2. A/C Button ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
Press and release to change the current setting, the
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
3. Recirculation Button mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
Press and release to change the current setting, the system will return the previous setting.
indicator illuminates when ON. 6. Rear Defrost Button
4. AUTO Operation Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
this function will cause the system to switch between defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to Automatic turns off after 10 minutes.
Operation for more information.
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
CAUTION!
slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to for warmer temperature settings.
the heating elements:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
Use care when washing the inside of the rear automatically exit Sync.
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth 8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button 4
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the (Uconnect 8.4 Radio Only)
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after Provides the passenger with independent temperature
soaking with warm water. control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
window cleaners on the interior surface of the slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow
window. for cooler temperature settings.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button automatically exit Sync.
(Uconnect 8.4 Only)
9. SYNC
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize Button On The Touchscreen
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem- Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
10. Blower Control area between the icons.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air 11. Modes
forced through the climate system. There are seven The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
Panel Mode
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
as follows: Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
control knob counterclockwise. air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode 12. Climate Control OFF Button
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is ON/OFF.
directed through the defrost and side window demis-
ter outlets. 13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect 8.4 Only)
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con- 4
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
warmer air from the floor outlets. trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
Floor Mode
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight temperature settings.
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets. NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
Mix Mode adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect Climate Control Functions
8.4 Only)
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem- to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
warmer temperature settings. the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
time. sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0 Radio Only) NOTE:
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem- of the windows.
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
tures.
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than Recirculation
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric you may wish to recirculate interior air by
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the pressing the Recirculation control button. The
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance. 4
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
MAX A/C selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance. NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the feature may be unavailable (button on touchscreen
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates greyed out). The Recirculation mode is not allowed in
when MAX A/C is ON. Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) NOTE:
Automatic Operation It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
AUTO button on the touchscreen.
as possible.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
units by selecting the Uconnect customer-
senger temperature buttons on the faceplate or but-
programmable feature. Refer to the Uconnect Sys-
tons on the touchscreen. Once the desired temperature
tem Settings in this section of the manual.
is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
cally maintain that comfort level. To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
not necessary to change the temperature. You will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically. Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by Summer Operation
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at The engine cooling system must be protected with a
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material 4
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your
selected in Manual operation. Vehicle for proper coolant selection.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently Winter Operation
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually, Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
temperature control will continue to operate automati- is not recommended because it may cause window
cally. fogging.
Operating Tips Vacation Storage
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
tions. conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Outside Air Intake
Window Fogging Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win- winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower slush, and snow.
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win-
A/C Air Filter
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather. The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
NOTE: totally filtered out. Refer to Maintenance Procedures in
Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instruc-
periods, as fogging may occur. tions.
Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
Uconnect VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0
or 8.4A/8.4AN system.
Uconnect 8.4AN
If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions. 4
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversa-
tions are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect Voice Command
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after 1 Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
the beep, then say your Voice Command. ceive A Text
2 For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts 8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Functions
Command from current category. 3 Push To End Call
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
Cancel to stop a current voice session
Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition systems status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen. Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
4
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say Help. The system will provide you with
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
a list of commands.
Media TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
Change source to Bluetooth
Change source to iPod
Change source to USB
Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media

Phone TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button and say Call, then pronounce the name
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi- exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and Call John Smith work.
pairing instructions. 4
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of
the following commands:
Call John Smith
Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone

Voice Text Reply PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
the Phone button and say Listen. (Must have com- Are you there ber> minutes
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.) Call me. late.
yet?
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push Ill call you I need See you in
the Phone button . After the beep, say: Reply. later. directions. <number> of
Im on my way. Cant talk right minutes.
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the Im lost. now. Thanks.
system prompts.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later. UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup-
Start without ports reading incoming text messages only.
No. Ill be Late.
me.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Press the VR button . After the beep, say one of the 4
following commands:
Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel (If equipped).
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) TIP: To start a POI search, press the VR button . After
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time the beep, say: Find nearest coffee shop.
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is
optional on the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer
to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, press the VR button . After
the beep, say:
For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: Enter state.
For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation

Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) Stolen Vehicle Assistance
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take Remote Vehicle Start**
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next Remote Horn and Lights
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get Yelp Search
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found Voice Texting 4
on the next page.
Roadside Assistance Call
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
Wi-Fi Hotspot***
vehicles purchased within the continental United States
and Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is **If vehicle is equipped.
available; see coverage map for details. ***Extra charges apply.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Register (8.4A/8.4AN) 5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and
complete the easy online registration process to create
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch
a personal Mopar Owner Connect account linked to
touchscreen.
your vehicle.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect Regis-
tration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and
confirm your personal email address. Then press
Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from
Uconnect Access.
Uconnect Registration 8.4A/8.4AN

Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) Download the Uconnect Access App to a compatible
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Apple or Android mobile devices. All you need to do
Uconnect Access App. Once you have downloaded the is:
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually 1. After registering with Uconnect Access, log on to
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with your Mopar Owner Connect account at
factory-installed Remote Start.) moparownerconnect.com. 4
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone
number to receive a link to download the App on your
mobile device. Or go to iTunes, or Google Play, and
search for the Uconnect Access App.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is
then connected to your mobile device.
Mobile App
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) Messages are limited to 140 characters.
1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
the beep, say the following command: Send mes- illuminated to use the feature.
sage to John Smith.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect your voice to search for the most popular places or things
to process your message. around you.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and 1. Press the VR button . After the beep, say:
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
Launch YELP.
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what youd like to do. For instance, if youre happy 2. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch-
with your message, after the beep, say: Send. screen, press the VR button , then say: YELP
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have search.
a compatible MAP enabled smartphone to use your 3. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
voice to send a personalized text message. Uconnect the place or business that youd like
TIP: Uconnect to find.
Not compatible with iPhone.

TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display. check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.) 4
Press the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
Show fuel prices
Show 5 - day weather forecast
Show extended weather
Yelp
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command. trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 or visit
DriveUconnect.com
Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Mon. Fri., 7:00 am 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am 5:00 pm, ET
SiriusXM Travel Link
Additional Information Uconnect Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when
2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
you call.
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED . . .353
Manual Transmission If Equipped . . . . . . . .346 MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED . .353
5
Automatic Transmission If Equipped . . . . .347 Six-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .353
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20F Or 14 Skip Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
29C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .358
After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .359 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission If FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 ONLY IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Manual Transmission If Equipped . . . . . . . .376
SPORT MODE WITHOUT PERFORMANCE Automatic Transmission If Equipped . . . . . .376
CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .370
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .378
Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .381
DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .384
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Run Flat Tires If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Spare Tires If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .393
Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 5
Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .394
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .396
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .413
TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .401
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .414
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .416
Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .404
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
3.6L Engine If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .430
5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission) . . .423 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) . . . . .424 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .431
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .431
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .426 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .445
5
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if in a location accessible to children), and do not
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
belts. Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
WARNING! controls, or move the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
Manual Transmission If Equipped
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking igni-
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of tion system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or pressed to the floor.
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to Normal Starting With Integrated Key Manual
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans- Transmission
mission gear selector.
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
(Continued) not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and cycle the Automatic Transmission If Equipped
ignition switch to the START position and release when The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15 position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
seconds, place the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to before shifting into any driving gear.
15 seconds, then repeat the Normal Starting procedure.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- 5
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it ing precautions are not observed:
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con-
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
verter and once the engine has started, ignite and
into any forward gear when the engine is above
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has
idle speed.
a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
a complete stop.
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
procedure carefully. Refer to Jump Starting in
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
What To Do In Emergencies for further informa-
idle speed.
tion.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start) Keyless Enter-N-Go
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the This feature allows the driver to oper-
accelerator pedal. ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
START/STOP button is installed and
Key to briefly place the ignition in the START position
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-
and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
Go Key Fob is in the passenger
motor will continue to run, and it will disengage auto-
compartment.
matically when the engine is running. If the engine fails
to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 Normal Starting
seconds. If this occurs, place the ignition in the LOCK/
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
Automatic Transmission Only
Normal Starting procedure.
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the 3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will the engine starting, release the button.
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
the engine starting, push the button again. pedal.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator START/STOP Button Automatic Transmission 5
pedal. Only
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then push and release
Manual Transmission Only the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pushing and 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
2. Release the button when the engine starts. If the STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds, release the speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the
button, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the Normal engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will
Starting procedure. remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in
PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the 3. Place the shift lever in first gear or REVERSE and then
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the apply the parking brake.
Driver Information Display (DID) will display a VE-
NOTE:
HICLE NOT IN PARK message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
PARK position, or it could roll. system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
position.
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
OFF position. inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and
the engine is not running.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button Manual Transmission Only If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in
seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition
NEUTRAL, then push and release the ENGINE
switch position will remain in the ACC position until
START/STOP button.
the vehicle is stopped and the button is pushed twice
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions With Drivers Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20F Or 29C)
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
Or NEUTRAL Position) an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and If Engine Fails To Start
RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these WARNING!
steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF posi- 5
tion: Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
change the ignition switch to the ACC position, causing serious personal injury.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position, started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to could enter the catalytic converter and once the
return the ignition switch to the OFF position. engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster the Normal Starting procedure.
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer START/STOP Button) Manual Transmission
to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen- Only
cies for further information. If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce-
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
START/STOP Button) Automatic Transmission and hold the clutch pedal, press the accelerator pedal all
Only the way to the floor and hold it, then push and hold the
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15
Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce- seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the Normal
and hold the brake pedal, press the accelerator pedal all Starting procedure.
the way to the floor and hold it, then push and release the
After Starting
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits Six-Speed Manual Transmission
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a WARNING!
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
You or others could be injured if you leave the
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one vehicle unattended without having the parking
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
5
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that especially on an incline.
is located near the air box.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
electrical cord could cause electrocution. abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to Electronic
(Continued)
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist in Start-
ing And Operating for further information.
Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchro-
nizer damage.
Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Dam-
age to the transmission may occur. Manual Shifter
Shifting
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
warms up. This is normal. accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not
CAUTION!
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
pedal when shifting. Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This may result in transmission damage.
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you You must always use first gear (or REVERSE) when
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second starting from a standing position.
or downshifting from sixth to fifth. 5
Recommended Shift Speeds
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recom-
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first mended shift speed chart.
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS

Axle Ratio 1-4 4-5 5-6
3.90 mph 20 37 48
(km/h) (32) (59) (77)
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy. This is normal operation of the transmission reverse
inhibitor system.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate. Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
NOTE:
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM.
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmis-
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop, sion is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an
you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with indication of a problem with your clutch or transmis-
the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position for sion.
Keyless Enter-N-Go), as compared to the ignition
14 Skip Shift
WARNING!
There are times when you must shift the transmission
directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
gear to second gear. This is to help you get the best could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs could have a collision.
when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106F
(41C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) CAUTION!
but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is 5
in first gear, and the accelerator is at throttle or less. If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you
After you shift the transmission to fourth gear, you can could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear. Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is
Downshifting moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could
damage the engine and/or clutch.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, down-
shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
grade.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING! When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL hicle against unwanted movement.
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
someone or something. Only shift into gear when access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
the engine is idling normally and your foot is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
firmly pressing the brake pedal. number of reasons. A child or others could be
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is or the transmission gear selector.
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, (Continued)
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
(Continued)
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not Key Ignition Park Interlock
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
A child could operate power windows, other con- lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
trols, or move the vehicle. before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
5
CAUTION! the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- the OFF position.
ing precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
the vehicle has come to a complete stop. This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU- Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
speed. out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot pedal must be pressed.
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission If
Equipped
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
on the shift lever and in the Driver Information Display
(DID).
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift
lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
Automatic Transmission Shifter
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or RE-
VERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
speeds (refer to Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys- precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
tem in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
driving. vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when ward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-)
shifting between these gears. position (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL
(AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
the instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the
TRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.
shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
control (refer to AutoStick in this section for further 5
information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or Gear Ranges
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc. NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the ment and possible injury or damage.
vehicle in this range. Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
brake.
before leaving the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau- the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)

Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is or the shift lever.
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, in a location accessible to children), and do not
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis- A child could operate power windows, other con- 5
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle trols, or move the vehicle.
against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the CAUTION!
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with start the engine and also press the brake pedal.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result.
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
number of reasons. A child or others could be PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that NEUTRAL (N)
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
tion: periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way leave the vehicle.
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
WARNING!
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P). Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
will not move out of PARK. practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
REVERSE (R) vehicle and have a collision.
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete CAUTION!
stop.
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
(Continued)
Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
severe transmission damage. Refer to Recreational excessive shifting and heat buildup.
Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A
Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies During extremely cold temperatures (-22F [-30C] or
for further information. below), transmission operation may be modified depend-
ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as
DRIVE (D) vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. 5
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down- MANUAL (M)
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
position) enables full manual control of transmission
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to
tics under all normal operating conditions.
AutoStick in this section for further information). Tog-
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as gling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually select
tions, in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds), the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in
use the AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick in this the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
section for further information) to select a lower gear.
Transmission Limp Home Mode NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en-
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may 1. Stop the vehicle.
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be turns OFF.
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary. 5. Restart the engine.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
following steps. operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- Operation
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your When the shift lever is in the DRIVE (D) position, the
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the
recur. shift lever into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be
service is required. displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a high-
lighted M (Manual) indication. When the shift lever is 5
AUTOSTICK in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the shift lever forward
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature (-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel, if
providing manual shift control, giving you more control equipped) to downshift the transmission to the next
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine lower gear, or tap the lever rearward (+) (or tap the (+)
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, shift paddle, if equipped) to command an upshift.
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
NOTE: Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift In temporary AutoStick mode (shift lever in DRIVE),
paddles (+/-), if equipped, while the shift lever is in the transmission will automatically shift up when
DRIVE, will activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tap- maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is
ping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the fully depressed, the transmission will downshift when
transmission to the next lower gear, while using (+) to possible (based on current vehicle speed and gear,
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The except 6.4L models). Lack of accelerator pedal activity
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster, will cause the transmission to revert to automatic
but the M will not be highlighted. The transmission will operation.
revert back to normal operation (if the shift lever remains
If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (shift lever in
in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on accelera-
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be
tor pedal activity.
maintained until the shift lever is returned to DRIVE,
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or or as described below. The transmission will not
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will
(using the shift lever, or the shift paddles [if equipped]), downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would pressed to the floor.
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
below.
display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to first Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver AutoStick is engaged.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
vehicle is accelerated.
fault or overheat condition is detected.
You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if
gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in
equipped, and the shift lever is already in DRIVE) until
snowy or icy conditions. 5
D is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time
over-speed, that shift will not occur. without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
WARNING!
of a vehicle speed.
Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if equipped), or Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
holding the shift lever in the (-) position, will down- slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
current speed. personal injury.
SPORT MODE WITHOUT PERFORMANCE DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
CONTROL
Acceleration
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
driving. The engine, transmission (when equipped with
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
automatic transmission), and steering systems are all set
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide im-
the rear (driving) wheels.
proved throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount
of steering feel. This mode may be activated and deacti-
WARNING!
vated by pushing the Sport button on the instrument Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
panel switch bank. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes, refer to Per- wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
formance Control If Equipped within Uconnect possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
further information. (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for im-
proved handling.
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping DRIVING THROUGH WATER
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed: Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure 5
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
slushy.
Flowing/Rising Water
Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become WARNING!
visible.
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
Keep tires properly inflated. water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or paths
Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
sudden stop.
(Continued)

carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
warning may result in injuries that are serious or ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
Shallow Standing Water injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through sengers, and others around you.
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so. CAUTION!
WARNING! Always check the depth of the standing water

before driving through it. Never drive through
Driving through standing water limits your vehi- standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
cles traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water. Determine the condition of the road or the path
Driving through standing water limits your vehi- that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
cles braking capabilities, which increases stopping the way before driving through the standing water.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving The electric power steering system will give you good
through standing water. This will minimize wave vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
effects. in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
Driving through standing water may cause damage light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
to your vehicles drivetrain components. Always the electric steering system experiences a fault that
inspect your vehicles fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans- prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., ability to steer the vehicle manually. 5
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
driving through standing water. Do not continue to through the Uconnect System. Refer to Customer
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami- Programmable Features or Performance Control If
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such Equipped within Uconnect Settings in Under-
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited standing Your Instrument Panel for further information.
Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicles engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
WARNING!
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be Under these conditions there will be a substantial
obtained as soon as possible. increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the SER- If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
VICE POWER STEERING or the POWER service.
STEERING ASSIST OFF SERVICE SYSTEM
message is displayed within the Driver Infor- FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES
mation Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to ONLY IF EQUIPPED
be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to Driver This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
Information Display (DID) in Understanding Your off four of the engines eight cylinders during light load
Instrument Panel for further information. and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position. wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
Enter-N-Go), the Brake Warning Light in the instru- before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it 5
ment cluster will illuminate.
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
NOTE: brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission If Equipped Automatic Transmission If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle. brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release
Automatic Transmission Parking Brake


Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake mode. A child could operate power windows, other
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move- controls, or move the vehicle.
ment and possible injury or damage. Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav- 5
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
number of reasons. A child or others could be PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be and cause damage or injury.
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever. CAUTION!
Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
in a location accessible to children), and do not
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
(Continued)
(Continued)
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an with the power system operating.
authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor-
BRAKE SYSTEM mance braking system. The brake pads are a semi-
metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and
systems loses normal capability, the remaining operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applica-
system will still function. There will be some tions) this is considered normal conditions.
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for system includes the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), the
example, repeated brake applications with the engine TCS (Traction Control System), the BAS (Brake Assist
System), and the ESC (Electronic Stability Control). These related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
and control in various driving conditions. is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill
Start Assist (HSA) is standard on all models. ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased debris, or panic stops. 5
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
You also may experience the following when the brake
braking conditions. The system automatically pumps
system goes into anti-lock:
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up. The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater The clicking sound of solenoid valves
control of available braking forces applied to the rear Brake pedal pulsations
axle.
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you of the stop
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING! The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains so- vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus- efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
ceptible to interference caused by improperly in- the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
stalled or high output radio transmitting The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
equipment. This interference can cause possible collisions, including those resulting from excessive
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of speed in turns, following another vehicle too
such equipment should be performed by qualified closely, or hydroplaning.
professionals. The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish (ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopar-
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just dize the users safety or the safety of others.
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop. All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
(Continued) accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning
Light remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not
functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
required.
Light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The
light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the Traction Control System (TCS)
ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
5
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
brake system is not functioning and that service is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
required. However, the conventional brake system will A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning (BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
Light is not on. wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Warning Light wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off or Full Off
the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in this
possible. section for more information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
vehicle braking capability during emergency braking BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those result-
maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli- slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
This can help reduce braking distances. reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS the users safety or the safety of others.
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
is released, the BAS is deactivated. the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
WARNING! brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics during this short period of time, the system will release
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
(Continued)
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
WARNING!
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel. There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
HSA Activation Criteria vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
activate: Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
Vehicle must be stopped. ing the vehicle. 5
Vehicle must be on a 3% (approximate) for manual HSA Off
transmission and 6% (approximate) for automatic If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in
transmissions. the Uconnect Settings. Refer to Uconnect Settings in
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor-
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- mation.
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle WARNING!
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
maintain the desired path. by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path all accidents, including those resulting from exces-
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares sive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
the condition of oversteer or understeer. attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
appropriate for the steering wheel position. which could jeopardize the users safety or the safety
of others.
ESC Operating Modes radio. To enter the Partial Off mode, momentarily push
the ESC Off switch and the ESC Off Indicator Light
The ESC system has two or three available operating modes:
will illuminate. To turn the ESC ON again, momentarily
ESC On push the ESC Off switch and the ESC Off Indicator
Light will turn off.
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this NOTE: To improve the vehicles traction when driving
mode. This mode should be used for most driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the 5
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. Partial Off mode by momentarily pushing the ESC
Off switch. Once the situation requiring Partial Off
Partial Off
mode is overcome, turn the ESC ON again by momen-
The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a tarily pushing the ESC Off switch. This may be done
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also while the vehicle is in motion.
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the WARNING!
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows. The ESC When in Partial Off mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
Off switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom except for the limited wheel spin feature described in
center of the instrument panel or in the touchscreen
(Continued)
Instrument Panel for further information. To turn ESC
ON again, momentarily push the ESC Off switch.
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC Off
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in Par- NOTE: The ESC off message will display and the
tial Off mode, the enhanced vehicle stability offered audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
by the ESC system is reduced. into the PARK position from any position other than
PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
Full Off If Equipped will occur when the message was previously cleared.
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
WARNING!
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned In the ESC Full Off mode, the engine torque
OFF. To enter the Full Off mode, push and hold the reduction and stability features are disabled. There-
ESC Off switch for five seconds while the vehicle is fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
chime will sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
illuminate, and the ESC Off message will display in the stability. ESC Off mode is intended for off-highway
vehicle odometer. The ESC off message may appear in or off-road use only.
the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to Driver
Information Display (DID) in Understanding Your
NOTE: When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature of the running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential. malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other, light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicles traction rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in diagnosed and corrected.
5
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (lo-
to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pushing the cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
ESC Off switch. the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
ESC OFF Indicator Light flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
NOTE: Synchronizing ESC
The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo- If the power supply is interrupted (battery
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the disconnected or discharged), the ESC
ON/RUN position. Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light may
illuminate with the engine running. If this
Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was left and then to the right. The ESC Activation/
cycled off previously. Malfunction Indicator Light should go out. However, if
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:
Tire Markings P (Passenger) Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter P
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have 5
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
1 U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load
Code (TIN)
letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced-
2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
3 Service Description 6 Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com- standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
EXAMPLE:
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
R means radial construction, or
D means diagonal or bias construction 5
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
5
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturers recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
5
cles loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the drivers
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Tire And Loading Information Placard 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tires load carrying capacity if you 5
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
Tire And Loading Information Placard gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
This placard tells you important information about the: axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. Vehicle Loading in this manual.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
vehicle, locate the statement The combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard. be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
the weight referenced here. (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occu-
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
XXX kg on your vehicles placard.
capacity calculated in step 4.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
(392 kg).
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating 5
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
Ride Comfort
WARNING!
Safety
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
WARNING!
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
overload them. cause collisions.
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re- 5
TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION sult in overheating and tire failure.
Over-inflation reduces a tires ability to cushion
Tire Pressure
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and cause damage that result in tire failure.
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
are affected by improper tire pressure: hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
Safety and Vehicle Stability loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
Economy lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
Tread Wear
(Continued)
Fuel Economy
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the resulting in higher fuel consumption.
right or left. Tread Wear
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE: Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure
drivers side B-Pillar or rear edge of the drivers side door. is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
At least once a month: mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires wall. 5
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
inflated. of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION! 12F (7C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- the Winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, Example: If garage temperature = 68F (20C) and the
which could damage the valve stem. outside temperature = 32F (0C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
WARNING!
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12F (7C) for this
outside temperature condition. High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
build up or your tire pressure will be too low. serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
Radial Ply Tires
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very WARNING!
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
The tire has not been driven on when flat. Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
5
The puncture is no greater than a of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information. Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40F (5C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or Snow Tires
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
WARNING! If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury only in sets of four; failure to do so
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates may adversely affect the safety and
the possibility of loss of vehicle control. handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be mation.
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
Spare Tires If Equipped
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to Tire Service Kit in
Run Flat Tires If Equipped
What To Do In Emergencies for further information.
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
5
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation CAUTION!
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi- Damage to the vehicle may result.
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Wheel If Equipped
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
mode.
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
tire rotation pattern.
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
Compact Spare Tire If Equipped wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the WARNING!
drivers side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T only. With these spares, do not drive more than
or S preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
80D18 103M. tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare If Equipped your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn WARNING!
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the 5
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity. inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
Limited-Use Spare If Equipped your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency drivers side door. Replace (or repair) the original
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the of vehicle control.
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicles wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In
Emergencies for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicles wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 1 Worn Tire
2 New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be tenance schedule is highly recommended.
replaced. Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for
further information. WARNING!
Life Of Tire Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to 5
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to: follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
Driving style. in serious injury or death.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Replacement Tires It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu- to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on WARNING!
Tread Wear Indicator. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex- pension dimensions and performance characteris-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
this manual for more information relating to the Load braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
affect your vehicles handling. If you ever replace a
approved for your vehicle.
wheel, make sure that the wheels specifications match
those of the original wheels.
(Continued)
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
capacity, other than what was originally equipped clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load against damage.
index could result in tire overloading and failure. Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
You could lose control and have a collision. recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire Install on Rear Tires Only. 5
failure and loss of vehicle control. Due to limited clearance, P235/55R18 or P225/60R18
tire with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6
CAUTION! low profile traction device or equivalent is recom-
mended.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read- WARNING!
ings.
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the Observe the traction device manufacturers instruc-
following precautions: tions on the method of installation, operating
Because of restricted traction device clearance be- speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
tween tires and other suspension components, it is suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
important that only traction devices in good condi- turers if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
the damaged parts of the device before further use. Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
Install device as tightly as possible and then re- different loads and perform different steering, driving,
tighten after driving about mile (0.8 km). and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). unequal rates.
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave- The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
ment. aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
(Continued)
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
The suggested rotation method is the forward cross
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
mended cold placard pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12F (6.5C). This means that when pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must TPM Telltale Light to turn off. The system will auto-
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into matically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn
the tire sidewall. Refer to Tires General Information off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
in Starting And Operating for information on how to The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
properly inflate the vehicles tires. The tire pressure will above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and this information.
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68F warning have been established for the tire size
(20C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
a temperature drop to 20F (-7C) will decrease the tire eration or sensor damage may result when using
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 5
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
inflated to the vehicles recommended cold placard pres- your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
sure value. sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
CAUTION! always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
The TPMS has been optimized for the original stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
NOTE: Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
the tire.
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition. Premium System
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
while adjusting your tire pressure. technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. readings to the receiver module.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and
stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
Four TPM sensors,
Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID), and
TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
5
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the DID will display a LOW TIRE
Tire Pressure Monitor Display message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the each tire with the low tire pressure values shown in a
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly different color. An Inflate Tire to XX message will also
and to maintain the proper pressure. be displayed in the DID display.
The TPMS consists of the following components: Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition
Receiver module,
(those shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to
the vehicles recommended cold placard pressure infla- If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
tion value as shown in the Inflate Tire to XX message. providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
system will automatically update, the graphic display in flash, and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no
the DID will return the pressure values shown to their longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes following:
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
this information.
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
Service TPMS Warning the TPM sensors.
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. materials that may block radio wave signals.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for
wheel housings.
a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
not being received.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The DID will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system display the low pressure values in a different color and
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is the Inflate Tire to XX message.
detected. In this case, the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
message is then followed with a graphic display with
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
addition, the DID will display a SERVICE TPM
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle 5
SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
Vehicles With Compact Spare
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a
the compact spare tire. minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn- 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of ing licenses:
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active United States MRXSSW4
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to Canada 2546A-SSW4
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information. FUEL REQUIREMENTS
General Information 3.6L Engine If Equipped
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the This engine is designed to meet all emis-
following conditions: sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
This device may not cause harmful interference.
ing high-quality unleaded Regular gaso-
This device must accept any interference received, line having an octane rating of 87 as speci-
including interference that may cause undesired op- fied by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
eration. Premium gasoline will not provide any benefit over
Regular gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not Plus gasoline is recommended for optimum perfor-
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard mance and fuel economy.
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme- While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower 5
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid- covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ering service for the vehicle. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission) starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high quality unleaded gasoline having
a posted octane number range of 87 to 89
5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
This engine is designed to meet all emission symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
regulations, provide optimal fuel economy ering service for the vehicle.
and performance when using high-quality 6.4L Engine
unleaded Premium gasoline having a
posted octane number of 91 as specified by
This engine is designed to meet all emission
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
regulations, provide optimal fuel economy
Premium gasoline is required for in this engine.
and performance when using high-quality
While operating on gasoline with the required octane unleaded Premium gasoline having a
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is posted octane number of 91 as specified by
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immedi- Premium gasoline is required for in this engine.
ately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or While operating on gasoline with the required octane
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine
is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these ates are required in some areas of the country during the
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid- Winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
ering service for the vehicle. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
5
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner CAUTION!
burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline.
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe- DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
prove air quality. blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop- emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im- cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
system components. fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E-85 MMT In Gasoline
ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac- Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
turer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol, it is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
does not have the negative effects of methanol. blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
line containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
ited Warranty.
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
Operate in a lean mode. the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Materials Added To Fuel
Poor engine performance.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
Poor cold start and cold drivability. contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel. or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
Fuel System Cautions assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
CAUTION! sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicles Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor- 5
performance:
mance problems resulting from the use of such
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
tem.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or you.
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
(Continued)
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
monoxide poisoning: with all side windows fully open.
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as haust gases from entering the vehicle.
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the ADDING FUEL
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
the vehicle. left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
(Continued) cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the 5
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not top
off the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle clicks or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
WARNING!
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
running. filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You Check Gascap message will display in the Driver
could be burned. Always place gas containers on Information Display (DID). If this occurs, tighten the fuel
the ground while filling. filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER
button to turn off the message. If the problem continues,
NOTE: the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started.
When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to Onboard Diagnostic
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound. System in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further infor-
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened mation.
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
VEHICLE LOADING Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the Vehicle Certification Label. This information Type of Vehicle
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated. Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 5
Vehicle Certification Label The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the drivers door. load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The label contains the following information:
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Name of manufacturer
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
Month and year of manufacture
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front rear GAWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
WARNING!
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is evenly over the front and rear axles.
important that you do not exceed the maximum front Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose components do not necessarily increase the vehicles
control of the vehicle and have a collision. GVWR.
Overloading Loading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
front and rear GAWR. evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
The best way to figure out the total weight of your driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
it is not over the GVWR. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE: Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
to the rear of the drivers door for your vehicles GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
and GAWRs. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
TRAILER TOWING weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
In this section, you will find safety tips and information on Certification Label in Starting And Operating for
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your further information.
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this infor- 5
mation to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
hicles used for trailer towing. porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and
ready for operation condition.
Manual Transmission If Equipped
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended. fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
Common Towing Definitions of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Tongue Weight (TW)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
and trailer when weighed in combination. hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
is 10% to 15% of the vehicles GTW for a conventional
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear vehicle.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear Frontal Area
GAWR. Refer to Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification La- The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
bel in Starting And Operating for further information. maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
WARNING!
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
Weight-Carrying Hitch
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
5
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized WARNING!
trailers.
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
Weight-Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever- performance, and could result in a collision.
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
tow vehicles front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
in accordance with the manufacturers directions, it pro- reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
Trailer Hitch Classification tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
The following chart provides the industry standard for correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Max. GTW (Gross

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. Tongue Wt.
Trailer Wt.)
3.6L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) 5
5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Trailer And Tongue Weight which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the many trailer collisions.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the your bumper or trailer hitch.
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the Tire And Loading Information placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: CAUTION!
The tongue weight of the trailer. Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
put in or on your vehicle. or other parts could be damaged.
The weight of the driver and all passengers. (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
the heavier loads. suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to 5
WARNING!
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
enough slack for turning corners.
possible:
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to transmission in PARK. Always, block or chock
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and the trailer wheels.
have a collision. GCWR must not be exceeded.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
Total weight must be distributed between the tow Tires General Information in Starting And Oper-
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ating for proper tire inflation procedures.
ratings are not exceeded:
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
1. Max loading as defined on the Tire and Loading sures before trailer usage.
Information placard.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
2. GTW
before towing a trailer. Refer to Tires General
3. GAWR Information in Starting And Operating for the
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti- proper inspection procedure.
lized. When replacing tires, refer to Tires General Infor-
mation in Starting And Operating for the proper
Towing Requirements Tires tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
spare tire. vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes
WARNING!
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicles hy-
This could cause inadequate braking and possible draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
personal injury. tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
required when towing a trailer with electronically distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with 5
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
brake controller is not required. collision.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of CAUTION!
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Four-Pin Connector
Refer to the following illustrations. 1 Female Pins 4 Park
2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop/Turn
3 Ground 6 Right Stop/Turn
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid 5
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
Seven-Pin Connector NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
1 Battery 5 Ground under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop/Turn mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
3 Right Stop/Turn 7 Running Lamps sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
4 Electric Brakes provide better engine braking.
Electronic Speed Control If Equipped To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
When using the speed control, if you experience speed a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until conditions allow.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Cooling System
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
maximize fuel efficiency. heating, take the following actions:
AutoStick
City Driving
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose 4 if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose 3 or Highway Driving
2 if needed to maintain the desired speed.
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Wheels OFF The

Towing Condition Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Ground
Flat Tow None NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED NOT RECOMMENDED 5
On Trailer All OK OK
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always
follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
Automatic Transmission If Equipped Manual Transmission If Equipped
Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for tow- NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for tow-
ing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle ing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground. trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will
occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the
ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may
occur. occur.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require- Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam- ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .449 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .462
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .463
TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .450 Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 6
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .451 Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .452 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .472
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .455 Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .481
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 449
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning On the highways slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- In city traffic while stopped, place the transmission in
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition: 6
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists. turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Small punctures up to (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads H, or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops mately -4F (-20C).
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the H, turn the engine off immediately and call for This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
service. to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Tire Service Kit Storage Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Components

1 Sealant Bottle 5 Mode Select Knob
Tire Service Kit Location 2 Deflation Button 6 Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 Pressure Gauge 7 Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 Power Button 8 Power Plug (located on the
bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Using The Deflation Button
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Selecting Air Mode Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
position for air pump operation only. Use the Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode. the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
Selecting Sealant Mode assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit section (F)
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the 6
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
tire application use and need to be replaced after each avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
use. Always replace these components immediately at Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than
your original equipment vehicle dealer. (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the heat source.
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
the Tire Service Kit. collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
under the following circumstances: the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
1/4 (6 mm) or larger. you, your passengers, and others around you.
If the tire has any sidewall damage. Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
If the tire has any damage from driving with Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
extremely low tire pressure. Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye,
tire. and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
If the wheel has any damage. plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
the wheel. is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy- necessary to place the valve stem in this position
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of before proceeding.
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
immediately. in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake. 6
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicles
Sealant Mode position.
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire.
valve stem. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 10
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicles 12 Volt power outlet. 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
nails) from the tire. stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Deflated Tire: Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air pressure within 15 minutes:
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). mended inflation pressure before continuing.
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). 6
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Kit.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi- 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure ment panel.
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
WARNING!
location. Quickly proceed to (D) Drive Vehicle.
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
CAUTION! Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. follow this warning can result in injuries that are
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con- around you.
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicles inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal (E) After Driving:
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to Whenever You Stop
permanent damage to the kit.
to Use Tire Service Kit before continuing.
(D) Drive Vehicle: 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Mode position.
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. vehicles 12 Volt power outlet.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
stem. Volt outlet.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
Gauge (3). the vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
service center.
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
6
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
panel after the tire has been repaired.
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
and loading information label on the driver-side door
sible. Refer to (F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
opening.
ment.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
vehicle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
of it accordingly. Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
housing. time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so properly calibrated torque wrench.
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
Torque Specifications Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/
Bolt Size Bolt Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 Nm) M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
6
Wheel Mounting Surface

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
WARNING!
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
against the wheel. been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
Torque Patterns
(Continued)
1. Open the trunk.
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get 2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle 6
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage

The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
Opening The Access Panel
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire. 3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to

access the jack.
Spare Tire Fastener Jack Fastener

4. Remove the spare tire. 6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
WARNING!
3. Set the parking brake.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- 4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in sion) or 1st gear (manual transmission).
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire 5. Turn OFF the ignition.
repaired or replaced immediately.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
Preparations For Jacking opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the ample, if changing the right front tire, 6
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery block the left rear wheel.
areas.
WARNING! NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle

when the vehicle is being jacked.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING! Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
help prevent personal injury or damage to your you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
vehicle: service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
vehicle. If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. careful of motor traffic.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
6
Jack Engagement Locations
Jack Warning Label 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
CAUTION! 2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center

cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
Instructions for this vehicle.
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Front Jacking Location

WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
Rear Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire

NOTE: 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a handle counterclockwise.
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. 10. Refer to Torque Specifications in this section for
Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited-Use proper lug nut torque.
Spare under TiresGeneral Information in 11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
Starting And Operating for additional warnings, of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its tightening down the fastener.
use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug WARNING! 6
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
WARNING! hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has repaired or replaced immediately.
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Road Tire Installation 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
seated against the wheel.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
lug nuts. If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
WARNING! another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
result in personal injury. follow the manufacturers operating instructions and
precautions.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise. CAUTION!
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
torque. other booster source with a system voltage greater
(Continued)
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the Remote Battery Posts Locations
engine compartment for jump-starting. 1 Remote Positive (+) Post
2 Remote Negative (-) Post
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
WARNING!
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when- parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by WARNING!
moving fan blades.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
could establish a ground connection and personal
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
injury could result.
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump-Starting Procedure
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
WARNING!
sparks away from the battery.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic result in personal injury or property damage due to
transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission) and battery explosion.
place the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
or the discharged vehicle. could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
Connecting The Jumper Cables not use any other exposed metal parts.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis-
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start 6
charged battery.
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
in the reverse sequence:
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
the vehicles battery will discharge sufficiently to
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. starting.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
with the discharged battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
you should have the battery and charging system in- steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
spected at your authorized dealer. front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission,
press and hold the lock button on the shift lever. Then
CAUTION! shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with
automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the
draw power from the vehicles battery, even when not accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without
plugged in long enough without engine operation, spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
(Continued)
NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts NOTE: Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at Stability Control (ESC) system in Partial Off mode
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the before rocking the vehicle. Refer to Electronic Brake
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 Control in Starting And Operating for further infor-
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ESC
DRIVE or REVERSE. Off switch again to restore ESC On mode.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be- 6
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en- tween DRIVE / 1ST GEAR and REVERSE, do not
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
least one minute after every five rocking-motion drivetrain damage may result.
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener- Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi- vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
cles wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- death for those in or around the vehicle.
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
WARNING!
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the Park Release lever.
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
(Continued)
Console Storage Bin Locking Tab

3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the 5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
tether strap up through the opening in the console position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
base. rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
it to the right.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
Tether Strap
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The AUTOMATIC TRANS- MANUAL TRANSMIS-

Ground MISSION SION
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is If transmission is
operable: operable:
Transmission in Transmission in 6
NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
30 mph (48 km/h) max 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed speed
30 miles (48 km) max 30 miles (48 km) max
distance distance
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED NOT RECOMMENDED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- Damage to your vehicle may occur from improper
ment manufacturers instructions. Use of safety chains is towing.
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding occur.
vehicles under tow must be observed.
Automatic Transmission
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
position, not the ACC position.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
CAUTION! sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following condi-
Do not use sling type equipment when towing. tions:
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
attach to front or rear suspension components. The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
(Continued) The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of four wheels on the ground) under the following condi-
towing is with a flatbed truck. tions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam- The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
age from improper towing is not covered under the If the transmission is not operable, then the only accept- 6
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. able method of towing is with a flatbed truck.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicles battery is
discharged, refer to Manual Park Release in this section CAUTION!
for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
out of PARK for towing. ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
Manual Transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not cov-
ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .488 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .489 Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6.4L (392 HEMI) . .490 Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II . .491 Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 7
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506

PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .494
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Transmission (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Park/Turn Lamp Models with Halogen
Headlamps If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Manual Transmission If Equipped . . . . . . .518
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Automatic Transmission If Equipped . . . . .519
and Park/Turn Lamp Models with High
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .548
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .530 Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .535 Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .548
VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.6L
1 Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 4 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Air Cleaner Filter
2 Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 Engine Oil Fill
3 Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 6 Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5.7L
1 Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 Engine Oil Fill
2 Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Dipstick
3 Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 6 Air Cleaner Filter 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6.4L (392 HEMI)
1 Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 6 Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
2 Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 7 Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Air Cleaner Filter
4 Engine Oil Fill 9 Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emission control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to Loose Fuel Filler Cap 7
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a
soon as possible. Check Gascap message will display in the Driver
Information Display (DID). If this occurs, tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the Trip Odometer button to
turn off the message. If the problem continues, the serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE your vehicles OBD II system is ready, you must do the
PROGRAMS following:
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
an inspection of your vehicles emissions control system.
not crank or start the engine.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- start this test over.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
system is ready for testing. (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen: may then indicate that the system is now ready.
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then Regardless of whether your vehicles OBD II system is
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
vehicles OBD II system is not ready and you should before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
not proceed to the I/M station. your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off REPLACEMENT PARTS
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicles OBD II system is ready and you can proceed Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled 7
to the I/M station. maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for mainte-
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, Limited Warranty.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person- The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service services determined by the engineers who designed your
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are vehicle.
available which include detailed service information for
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
Maintenance Schedule, there are other components
attempting any procedure yourself.
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil CAUTION!
penalties being assessed against you.
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
WARNING! form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
You can be badly injured working on or around a components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service repair center.
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
(Continued)
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids fully warmed engine is shut off.
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter- Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo- improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine, the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
transmission, power steering or air conditioning. dipstick. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of on these engines.
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure. CAUTION! 7
Engine Oil Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or

loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level 3.6L Engine
Checking Oil Level 5.7L and 6.4L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to Change Engine Oil 3.6L and 5.7L Engine
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
fully warmed engine is shut off. time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa-
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain tion.
the oil level in the SAFE range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0 NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
liter) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the months, whichever occurs first.
SAFE range on these engines.
Change Engine Oil 6.4L Engine
CAUTION! The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection 3.6L and 5.7L Engine
CAUTION!
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Selection 6.4L Engine American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the This symbol means that the oil has
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. been certified by the American
7
Petroleum Institute (API). The
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
manufacturer only recommends
SAE 0W-40 engine oil or equivalent meeting the require-
API Certified engine oils.
ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-
20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 en-
gine oils.
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
CAUTION!
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the Shell Helix or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Engine Oil Viscosity 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Viscosity 3.6L Engine MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler Pennzoil or Shell Helix is recommended for all oper-
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell ating temperatures. This engine oil improves low tem-
Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating perature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
starting and vehicle fuel economy. engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil filler cap location, refer to Engine Compart-
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa-
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the Engine Com- tion.
partment illustration in this section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use Materials Added To Engine Oil
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to Fuel dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
Saver Technology If Equipped in Starting And Oper- the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
ating for further information. performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi- tives.
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number Synthetic Engine Oils
should not be used.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
Engine Oil Viscosity 6.4L Engine mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
Use Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 engine or equivalent mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes 7
MOPAR oil meeting the Chrysler Material Standard are followed.
MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
engine oil filler cap location, refer to Engine Compart- indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa- environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
tion.
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
WARNING!
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area. The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
Engine Oil Filter provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
at every engine oil change. for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
Engine Oil Filter Selection near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
This manufacturers engines have a full-flow type oil hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
serious personal injury.
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
filter and are recommended.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
Engine Air Cleaner Filter used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
maintenance intervals.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump-starting. Refer to Jump-Starting
Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further
information.
7
Battery Location
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid It is essential when replacing the cables on the
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme- battery that the positive cable is attached to the
diately with large amounts of water. positive post and the negative cable is attached to
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
a booster battery or any other booster source with battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable terminal posts and free of corrosion.
clamps to touch each other. If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
after handling. use a fast charger to provide starting voltage.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
at the start of each warm season. This service should injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this should be done by an experienced technician.
time.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- system as the chemicals can damage your air condi- 7
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a If
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Equipped
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information. R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
(Continued)
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- A/C Air Filter
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. 1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf the retaining clips.
If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmen-
tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
7
Access Door Filter Access Cover
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover. 3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
A/C Air Filter
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
5. Close the filter access cover.
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
maintenance intervals. year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
tions of salt or road film. windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
from a dry windshield. washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
7
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
containers.
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
appears in the Driver Information Display (DID). aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
WARNING! into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
Commercially available windshield washer solvents for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around WARNING!
the washer solution.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Exhaust System carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
system. CO, refer to Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas in Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; information.
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
over materials that can burn. Such materials might involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve- Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con- malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
tact anything that can burn. resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
The catalytic converter requires the use of un- verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- 7
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor- damage.
mance and cause serious damage to the engine. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. against you.
(Continued)
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning NOTE: Your vehicles exhaust system may be equipped
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may be illuminated.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturers specifica-
Cooling System
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- WARNING!
age:
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
disconnect the fan motor lead or place the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
in the LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless
motion.
Enter-N-Go). The fan is temperature controlled
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the and can start at any time the ignition switch is in
vehicle. the ON position (RUN position for Keyless Enter-
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires N-Go).
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
(Continued)
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
do not open the hood until the radiator has had proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
pressure cap when the radiator is hot. properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
Coolant Checks
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
fresh coolant. Check the front of the radiator for any considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a 7
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
face of the condenser. dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub- Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection maintenance intervals.
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts in OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information. thorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
CAUTION! coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine may plug the radiator.
damage and may decrease corrosion protection. This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
ant is different and should not be mixed with Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en- tifreeze) is not recommended.
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any globally compat-
Adding Coolant
ible coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
system in an emergency, the cooling system will coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(Continued)
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owners responsibility to main-
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
dard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler 7
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Material Standard MS.90032.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- needed to be added to the system please contact your
dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concen- local authorized dealer.
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
34 F (37 C) are anticipated.
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
possible. cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
Cooling System Pressure Cap prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine pressure cap while the system is hot or under
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant pressure.
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
recovery bottle. specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
WARNING!
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the with your local authorities to determine the disposal
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
(Continued)
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek Points To Remember
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
spills immediately.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
Coolant Level from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be- coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
tween the ranges indicated on the bottle. If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
7
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the ing.
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Brake System
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
for leaks. system components should be inspected periodically.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to maintenance intervals.
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum WARNING!
components.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
hoses are not kinked or obstructed. riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the possible brake damage. You would not have your full
condenser clean. braking capacity in an emergency.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
WARNING!
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing Use only manufacturers recommended brake
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the MAX fluid. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may can severely damage your brake system and/or
cause leaking in the system. impair its performance. The proper type of brake
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require- fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or 7
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed. moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid. Re- cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fer to Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts in Main- fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
taining Your Vehicle for further information. air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
(Continued)
Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Transmission
(If Equipped)
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
This could result in a collision. volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing manufacturers recommended brake fluid. Refer to Flu-
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also ids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts in Maintaining
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be Your Vehicle for further information.
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. Manual Transmission If Equipped
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be Fluid Level Check
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
This could result in a collision. side of the transmission. The fluid level should be 1/4
inch (6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid,
if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to Flu-
ids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts in Maintaining
Your Vehicle for further information.
Automatic Transmission If Equipped
CAUTION!
Selection Of Lubricant
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
transmission. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, And only the manufacturers specified transmission fluid.
Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifica- Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts in this
tions. section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
Change Transmission Fluid recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immedi- in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used. 7
ately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION!

shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
filter changes. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, And the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifica- nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
tions. Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Special Additives Fluid Level Check
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
any special additives in the transmission. adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
product and its performance may be impaired by supple- sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- transmission fluid level using special service tools.
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
adversely affect seals. with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
Rear Axle
CAUTION!
Fluid Level Check
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam- Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper ground and has been stationary for 15 minutes will
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. improve the accuracy of the fluid level reading.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
Fluid And Filter Changes
axle. The fluid level should be 1-2.5mm below the fill
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at plug. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts in
life of the vehicle. Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information. 7
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How- Change Axle Fluid
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads The most common causes are:
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside Stone and gravel impact.
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami- Insects, tree sap and tar.
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi- Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
underbody protection.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle. car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR a month.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing open.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION! 7
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
scratch metal and painted surfaces. cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) the owner.
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
packaged and sealed. chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheels
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
and tarnishing.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
match the color of your vehicle. surface.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care CAUTION!

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
may damage the wheels protective finish. Such
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo- Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces- NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
CAUTION!
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
CAUTION! 7
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
damage the wheels protective finish. Such damage is
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
required to maintain this finish.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Interior Care
Equipped Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products. upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, age than glass headlights.
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore 7
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
CAUTION! To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
Damage caused by these type of products may not be remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
rag.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
Seat Belt Maintenance
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror. If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are cloth.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and WARNING!
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
bing, etc.). material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders age. 7
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
is off and that all the other services are switched off
with the cupholder in the center console.
and/or disengaged.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed. If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
(Continued)
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
Front Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

allow water to get into the power distribution use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
center and possibly result in an electrical system result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
failure. a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
(Continued)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

1 Fuse Spare 7
2 40 Amp Green Radiator Fan #1 If Equipped
3 50 Amp Red Power Steering #1 / Radiator Fan (6.2L
Supercharged) If Equipped
4 30 Amp Pink Starter
5 40 Amp Green Electronic Stability Control
6 30 Amp Pink Electronic Stability Control

7 Fuse Spare
8 20 Amp Blue Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
9 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module If Equipped
10 10 Amp Red Security If Equipped / Under hood
Lamp Police
11 20 Amp Yellow Horns
12 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
13 Fuse Spare
14 Fuse Spare
15 20 Amp Yellow Left HID If Equipped
16 20 Amp Yellow Right HID If Equipped
18 50 Amp Red Radiator Fan #2 If Equipped
19 50 Amp Red Power Steering #2 / Radiator Fan
(6.2L Supercharged)
20 30 Amp Pink Wiper Motor

21 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Washers If Equipped / Police
Feed
22 40 Amp Green / 20 Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged)
Amp Blue Police / Police Bat Feed # 3 If Equipped
23 20 Amp Blue Police Bat Feed # 1 If Equipped
24 20 Amp Blue Police Bat Feed # 3 If Equipped
28 Fuse Spare
29 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module (LA/LD Po-
lice) 7
30 Fuse Spare
31 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
32 Fuse Spare
33 Fuse Spare
34 25 Amp Clear Powertrain #1
35 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain #2

36 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module
37 10 Amp Red Engine Controller/Rad Fan Relays If
Equipped
38 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
39 10 Amp Red Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay
48 10 Amp Red AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect (LX) /
Adaptive Cruise (LA) If Equipped
49 Fuse Spare
50 Fuse Spare
51 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump
52 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise (LD/LX) If Equipped
53 Fuse Spare
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
7
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
Opening The Access Cover cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

allow water to get into the power distribution use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
center and possibly result in an electrical system result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
failure. a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
(Continued)

2 60 Amp Yellow Front PDC Feed #1
3 Fuse Spare
4 60 Amp Yellow Front PDC Feed #2
5 30 Amp Pink Sunroof / Dome Lamp
Police
6 40 Amp Green Exterior Lighting #1
7 40 Amp Green Exterior Lighting #2

8 30 Amp Pink Interior Lighting
9 40 Amp Green Power Locks
10 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Control
Module
11 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Control
Module
12 20 Amp Yellow Dual USB Center Console
Rear/Cigar Lighter IP If
Equipped
7
15 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower
16 20 Amp Blue Left Spot Lamp Police
17 Fuse Spare
18 30 Amp Pink Mod Network Interface
Police

19 Fuse Spare
20 Fuse Spare
21 30 Amp Pink (6.2L Super- Fuel Pump (6.2L Super-
charged) charged)
25 Amp Clear (LD STD) Fuel Pump (LD STD)
22 20 Amp Yellow Police Right Spot Lamp Police
10 Amp Red LA Integrated Center Stack
LA
23 10 Amp Red Fuel Door/Diagnostic
Port
24 15 Amp Blue Integrated Center Stack
LD/LX
25 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor

26 15 Amp Blue LD/LX Transmission / Electronic
25 Amp Clear LA Shift Module (LD/LX)
30 Amp Green LA 6.2L Fuel Pump (LA)
Supercharged Fuel Pump (LA 6.2L Su-
percharged)
27 25 Amp Clear Amplifier If Equipped
31 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats
32 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster
33 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch/RF hub
7
Module/Steering Column
Lock-LX If Equipped
34 10 Amp Red Steering Column
Module/Clock/Spare
Police
35 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor

36 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust Valve
If Equipped
37 20 Amp Yellow Radio
38 15 Amp Blue LD/LX Console Power Outlet/
20 Amp Yellow LA Console Media Hub (LD/
LX)
Power Outlet Inside Arm
Rest/Console Media Hub
(LA)
40 Fuse Spare
41 Fuse Spare
42 30 Amp Pink Rear Defrost
43 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats/
Steering Wheel Module
44 10 Amp Red Park Assist / Blind Spot /
Rear View Camera

45 15 Amp Blue Cluster / Rearview Mir-
ror / Compass(LDLX)/
Humidity Sensor
46 Fuse Spare
47 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting /
Auto High BEAM / Day
Time Running Lamps- If
Equipped
48 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension SRT
7
49 Fuse Spare
50 Fuse Spare
51 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats If
Equipped
52 10 Amp Red Heated Cupholders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches If
Equipped

53 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Car
Temperature Sensor
54 10 Amp Red Airbag Module (LA)
55 Fuse Spare
56 Fuse Spare
57 Fuse Spare
58 10 Amp Red Airbag Module (LD/LX)
59 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals Police
60 5 Amp Tan Heated Washer Nozzles
(LD)
61 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter (LA) If
Equipped
62 Fuse Spare
63 Fuse Spare
64 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (LD/LX)

65 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
66 Fuse Spare
67 10 Amp Red Rain and Light Sensor/
Sunroof
68 10 Amp Red Dual USB Power Outlet
R/A Sense (LD/LX) Rear
Sunshade (LD/LX)
69 Fuse Spare
70 Fuse Spare 7
VEHICLE STORAGE service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
battery.
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. started again.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Box Lamp If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamp High Intensity Discharge (HID) D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) *
Halogen Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Park/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Tail Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) 7
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
* The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of authorized dealer for service.
BULB REPLACEMENT 4. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to
remove.
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric 5. Remove bulb by turning it counter clockwise and
conditions change to allow the condensation to change disconnect.
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
6. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect.
accelerate the clearing process.
7. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
and then reinstall headlamp cover.
Park/Turn Lamp Models with Halogen
Headlamps If Equipped To replace the driver side lamps:
To replace the passenger side lamps: 1. Open the hood.
1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the air cleaner filter cover by removing three
fasteners and loosening the clean air inlet clamp and
2. Remove the headlamp cover.
then rotate cover off to the side.
3. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.
NOTE: The cover has an electrical connector that does
NOTE: The park/turn lamps can also be accessed at this not need to be disconnected if the cover is rotated off to
point. the side.
3. Remove one fastener on the lower air box to remove Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
and access the rear of the headlamp assembly. Park/Turn Lamp Models with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps If Equipped
4. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.
HID Headlamps
5. Remove the headlamp cover.
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
6. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
remove. headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
7. Remove bulb by turn it counter clockwise and discon- this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
nect. yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
8. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect. 7
9. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise WARNING!
and then reinstall headlamp cover.
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
10. Reinstall engine air cleaner assembly. HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, Center Tail/Backup Lamp
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to The Center Tail/Backup Lamp use LED lamps that are
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after not serviceable separately. The Center Tail/Backup Lamp
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp dealer.
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
assembly, see your authorized dealer. separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp see your authorized dealer.
The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps that are License Lamp
not serviceable separately. The Tail/Turn and Stop The License Lamp use LED lamps that are not serviceable
Lamps must be replaced as an assembly, see your autho- separately. The License Lamp must be replaced as an
rized dealer. assembly, see your authorized dealer.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
7
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant 15 Quarts 14.4 Liters
conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technol-
ogy).
Engine Oil 3.6L & 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil 6.4L Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recom-
mends full synthetic engine oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil UltraTM
0W-40 or equivalent MOPAR engine oil meeting the re-
quirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633 for use
in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 3.6L Engine We recommend you use 87 Octane 7
Fuel Selection 5.7L Engine With Automatic 89 Octane recommended 87 Octane acceptable
Transmission
Fuel Selection 5.7L Engine With Manual We recommend you use 91 Octane or higher.
Transmission & 6.4L Engine
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
damage and may decrease corrosion protection. be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- may plug the radiator.
ant is different and should not be mixed with This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any globally compat- Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
ible coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine tifreeze) is not recommended.
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
Chassis

Manual Transmission If We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
Equipped Fluid.
8-Speed Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid,
If Equipped or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Rear Axle If Equipped with Au- We recommend you use MOPAR OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 7
tomatic Transmission 75W85 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle If Equipped with We recommend you use MOPAR LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE
Manual Transmission 75W85 (API GL-5).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 6.4L . . . . . . . .563
3.6L AND 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Maintenance Chart 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Maintenance Chart 3.6L And 5.7L . . . . . . . .558
8
556 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 3.6L AND 5.7L The message Oil Change Required will be displayed in
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
oil change is necessary.
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
scheduled maintenance. message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
referring to the steps described under Driver Informa-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
tion Display (DID) in Understanding Your Instrument
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
Panel for further information.
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the Change Oil or Oil Change Re- NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
quired message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as whichever comes first.
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
Severe Duty All Models
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km). Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 557
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Check engine oil level Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Check windshield washer fluid level
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, service
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service. Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake required
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed. Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
Check function of all interior and exterior lights and park brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and
Required Maintenance Intervals. hoses 8
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following Inspect exhaust system
page for the required maintenance intervals. Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
Maintenance Chart 3.6L And 5.7L
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
(whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
128,000 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals and replace if X X X X X X X
necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid. X X X X
Inspect the manual transmission
fluid (if equipped), add as neces- X X X X
sary.
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Inspect the brake linings, replace

X X X X X X X
as necessary.
Adjust park brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc X X X X X X X
brakes.
Additional Maintenance 8
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning
X X X X X X X
filter.
Replace spark plugs (3.6L en-
X
gine). **
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Replace spark plugs (5.7L en-

X
gine). **
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
X X
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Change the manual transmission

fluid (if equipped) if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
Most of your driving is at sus-
X X X
tained speeds during hot
weather, above 90F (32C),
driving in dusty conditions, or 8
stop and go driving.
Change the rear axle fluid if us-
ing your vehicle for any of the
X X X
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-
road, or frequent trailer towing.
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Inspect and replace PCV valve if

X
necessary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
WARNING! service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
You can be badly injured working on or around a Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you hicle could result in a component malfunction and
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
(Continued)
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 6.4L Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main- (805 km).
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating NOTE:
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
if it has been six months since your last oil change,
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. illuminated.
The message Oil Change Required will be displayed in Change your engine oil more often if you drive your 8
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
oil change is necessary.
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a as required.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
referring to the steps described under Driver Informa- needed.
tion Display (DID) in Understanding Your Instrument
Panel for further information. Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Stop For Fuel
At Each Oil Change
Check the engine oil level. Refer to Maintenance
Procedures/Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve- Change the engine oil filter.
hicle for further information. Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required. CAUTION!
Once A Month Failure to perform the required maintenance items
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or may result in damage to the vehicle.
damage.
Maintenance Chart 6.4L
102,000
108,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
114,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6,000
Miles:
Or
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Months:
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
110,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Kilo-
meters:
Change the
engine oil
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
and engine
oil filter.
Rotate the
tires, rotate 8
at the first
sign of ir-
regular
wear, even X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
if it occurs
before
scheduled
mainte-
nance.
Or
Miles:
place if
cleaner
If using
off-road
hicle for
dusty or
meters:
your ve-
filter; re-
Or Kilo-
Months:
following:
engine air
any of the
necessary.
conditions.
Inspect the
6
10,000 6,000
X
12
20,000 12,000
18
30,000 18,000
X
24
40,000 24,000
30
50,000 30,000
X
36
60,000 36,000
42
70,000 42,000
X
48
80,000 48,000
54
90,000 54,000
X
60
100,000 60,000
66
110,000 66,000
X
72
120,000 72,000
130,000 78 78,000
X
84
140,000 84,000
90
150,000 90,000
X
96
160,000 96,000
170,000 102,000
X
180,000 108,000
190,000 114,000
X
200,000 120,000
210,000 126,000
X
220,000 132,000
230,000 138,000
X
240,000 144,000
250,000 150,000
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or
Miles:
place if
system.
exhaust
meters:
ings; re-
Or Kilo-
Months:
brake lin-
CV joints.
necessary.
Inspect the
Inspect the
Inspect the
6
10,000 6,000
X
X
X
12
20,000 12,000
18
30,000 18,000
X
X
X
24
40,000 24,000
30
50,000 30,000
X
X
X
36
60,000 36,000
42
70,000 42,000
X
X
X
48
80,000 48,000
54
90,000 54,000
X
X
X
60
100,000 60,000
66
110,000 66,000
X
X
X
72
120,000 72,000
130,000 78 78,000
X
X
X
84
140,000 84,000
90
150,000 90,000
X
X
X
96
160,000 96,000
170,000 102,000
X
X
180,000 108,000
190,000 114,000
X
X
X
200,000 120,000
210,000 126,000
X
X
X
220,000 132,000
230,000 138,000
X
X
X
240,000 144,000
250,000 150,000
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
8
(if
Or
Miles:
brakes.
parking
Change
vehicles
meters:
Or Kilo-
with four
Months:
brake on
sion fluid
transmis-
equipped
Adjust the
wheel disc
equipped).
the manual
6
10,000 6,000
12
20,000 12,000
18
30,000 18,000
24
40,000 24,000
X
30
50,000 30,000
36
60,000 36,000
42
70,000 42,000
X
48
80,000 48,000
54
90,000 54,000
X
60
100,000 60,000
66
110,000 66,000
72
120,000 72,000
130,000 78
84 78,000
140,000 84,000
X
90
150,000 90,000
X
96
160,000 96,000
170,000 102,000
180,000 108,000
190,000 114,000
X
200,000 120,000
210,000 126,000
220,000 132,000
230,000 138,000
X
240,000 144,000
X
250,000 150,000
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
(if
Or
Miles:
add as
manual
meters:
Or Kilo-
Months:
sion fluid
transmis-
equipped),
necessary.
Inspect the
6
10,000 6,000
12
20,000 12,000
18
30,000 18,000
X
24
40,000 24,000
30
50,000 30,000
36
60,000 36,000
42
70,000 42,000
48
80,000 48,000
54
90,000 54,000
60
100,000 60,000
66
110,000 66,000
X
72
120,000 72,000
130,000 78
84 78,000
140,000 84,000
90
150,000 90,000
96
160,000 96,000
170,000 102,000
180,000 108,000
190,000 114,000
X
200,000 120,000
210,000 126,000
220,000 132,000
230,000 138,000
240,000 144,000
250,000 150,000
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
8
Or
fluid.
trailer
Miles:
fleet or
towing.
the rear
Change
meters:
frequent
Or Kilo-
Months:
rear axle
following:
any of the
vehicle for
using your
axle fluid if
Inspect the
police, taxi,
6
10,000 6,000
12
20,000 12,000
X
18
30,000 18,000
24
40,000 24,000
30
50,000 30,000
X
36
60,000 36,000
42
70,000 42,000
X
48
80,000 48,000
X
54
90,000 54,000
60
100,000 60,000
66
110,000 66,000
X
72
120,000 72,000
130,000 78
84 78,000
140,000 84,000
X
90
150,000 90,000
X
96
160,000 96,000
170,000 102,000
X
180,000 108,000
190,000 114,000
200,000 120,000
X
210,000 126,000
220,000 132,000
230,000 138,000
X
240,000 144,000
250,000 150,000
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or
tie rod
Miles:
or end
proper
and all
place if
Inspect
or leaks
meters:
play; re-
parts for
Or Kilo-
pension,
Months:
damage,
wear, im-
front sus-
for cracks
ends, and
looseness
necessary.
boot seals,
6
10,000 6,000
X
12
20,000 12,000
18
30,000 18,000
X
24
40,000 24,000
30
50,000 30,000
X
36
60,000 36,000
42
70,000 42,000
X
48
80,000 48,000
54
90,000 54,000
X
60
100,000 60,000
66
110,000 66,000
X
72
120,000 72,000
130,000 78 78,000
X
84
140,000 84,000
90
150,000 90,000
X
96
160,000 96,000
170,000 102,000
X
180,000 108,000
190,000 114,000
X
200,000 120,000
210,000 126,000
X
220,000 132,000
230,000 138,000
X
240,000 144,000
250,000 150,000
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
8
Or
sary
filter.
the air
Miles:
and re-
Inspect
meters:
Replace
Replace
Or Kilo-
ing filter.
if neces-
Months:
place the
condition-
air cleaner
the engine
PCV Valve
6
10,000 6,000
X
12
20,000 12,000
18
30,000 18,000
X
24
40,000 24,000
X
30
50,000 30,000
X
36
60,000 36,000
42
70,000 42,000
X
48
80,000 48,000
54
90,000 54,000
X
X
60
100,000 60,000
66
110,000 66,000
X
72
120,000 72,000
130,000 78 78,000
X
84
140,000 84,000
X
90
150,000 90,000
X
96
160,000 96,000
170,000 102,000
X 180,000 108,000
190,000 114,000
X
X
200,000 120,000
210,000 126,000
X
220,000 132,000
230,000 138,000
X
240,000 144,000
X
250,000 150,000
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or
km).
miles
Miles:
gine **
150,000
plugs
(240,000
meters:
Replace
months if
Or Kilo-
6.4L En-
Months:
Flush and
ant at 120
the spark
replace the
not done at
engine cool-
6
10,000 6,000
12
20,000 12,000
18
30,000 18,000
24
40,000 24,000
30
50,000 30,000
36
60,000 36,000
42
70,000 42,000
48
80,000 48,000
54
90,000 54,000
60
100,000 60,000
66
110,000 66,000
72
120,000 72,000
130,000 78
84 78,000
140,000 84,000
90
150,000 90,000
X
96
160,000 96,000
170,000 102,000
180,000 108,000
190,000 114,000
X 200,000 120,000
210,000 126,000
220,000 132,000
230,000 138,000
240,000 144,000
X
250,000 150,000
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
8
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .581
FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .578 In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 9
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .578
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .582
576 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 577
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicles
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicles problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If youve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. 9
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturers authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process. P.O. Box 218004
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 483218004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance. Phone: (800) 423-6343
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturers customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturers customer cen-
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
Owners name and address
Owners telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico Contact Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
Mexico, D. F. a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech repairs after the manufacturers New Vehicle Limited
Impaired (TDD/TTY) Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the the manufacturers service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- manufacturers service contract, you will receive Plan
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you 9
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter have any questions about the service contract, call the
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturers Service Contract National Customer
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
WARNING!
contract that is not the manufacturers service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
manufacturers service contract. If you purchased a ser- some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
vice contract that is not a manufacturers service contract, nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
and you require service after the manufacturers New of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contract documents, and contact the person listed in contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
those documents. nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
We appreciate that you have made a major investment State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer or other reproductive harm.
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with WARRANTY INFORMATION
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
concerns. warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
operating at its best. Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could You can also obtain other information about motor
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer. If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme- 9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas- charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac- make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
for an order form. features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes). ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owners Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
These Owners Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan- cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Call toll free at: Treadwear
1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
1-800-387-1143 (Canada) conditions on a specified government test course. For
Or example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
www.techauthority.com actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
TIRE QUALITY GRADES teristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by Traction Grades
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
specific grade rating assigned by the tires manufacturer
and C. These grades represent the tires ability to stop on 9
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle. wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
requirements in addition to these grades.
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
WARNING!
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on wheel, than the minimum required by law.
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or WARNING!
peak traction characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
Temperature Grades a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat heat buildup and possible tire failure.
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
INDEX 585
INDEX
10
586 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375, 378 Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .154 Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Air bag Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 65, 92, 219
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .500
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 53 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324, 504
Air Bag Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .323, 325
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503, 504
Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322, 503
Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 65 Alarm
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 53 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
INDEX 587
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512, 549 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . .366
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Anti-Lock Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 381 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .23
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . .314, 322 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360, 519, 521 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 553 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 10
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378, 516
588 INDEX
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516, 553 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 378 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . .87 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .492
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544, 546 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 544 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Child Restraints
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Caps, Filler Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498, 499 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .80
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 428 Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .79
INDEX 589
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511, 515
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .74 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .70 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Cleaning Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .512, 549, 550
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209, 529
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . .248, 250
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .514 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 10
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
590 INDEX
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Driver Information Display
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 237
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 237
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Driving
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Disposal Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .530
Door Locks Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .150, 154
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 28 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Emergency, In Case of
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
INDEX 591
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498, 499
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .492 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 549
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 490 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498, 499
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488, 489, 490 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511, 550 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 428 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 428
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 508
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 10
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495, 549, 550 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
592 INDEX
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .550
Filters Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137, 219
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324, 504 Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500, 550 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 139, 219 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Fluid Level Checks Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 550
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
INDEX 593
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Hazard
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . .194, 200 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428, 491 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Gauges Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .139
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134, 145
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 10
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431, 434 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431, 433 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
594 INDEX
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
.127
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
.108
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .143
.353
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
.139
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iPod Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
.382
Hitches iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Ignition Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 466
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217, 218, 219 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .17, 23
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .17, 23
INDEX 595
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 348 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Keyless Enter-N-Go Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 544
Lock The Vehicles Doors . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 258, 278 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 133
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .258, 278 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 65, 92, 219
Unlock From The Drivers Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 381
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 378
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 193 10
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 139
596 INDEX
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 193
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137, 219 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 547 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544, 546
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .134, 145 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .219
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .219, 416
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 219 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 138, 139, 219
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .219
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 219 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431, 432
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 193 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .219 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 193 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .142 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
INDEX 597
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493, 581
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 563, 565 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .219, 492
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 518, 521
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518, 521 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 193 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 550
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 495, 550
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 10
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 108 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
598 INDEX
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500, 550Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 ParkSense System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 549 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .397
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498, 499, 549 Power
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Operator Manual (Owners Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .206
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Owners Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 582 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
INDEX 599
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Pretensioners Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Refrigerant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503, 504
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Programmable Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248, 250 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Remote Control
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .514 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .17, 23
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .17, 23
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 10
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .310
600 INDEX
Remote Starting Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Uconnect Customer Programmable Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260, 281
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260, 281 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 563
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Seat Belt
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .50
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 91
INDEX 601
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 43, 46 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 SENTRY KEY
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .219
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 10
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 139, 219
602 INDEX
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 148
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408, 409, 463 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 148
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Specifications Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .310
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323, 543
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 154 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 346 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .53
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Steering Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 148
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .322
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .219
INDEX 603
Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 148 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .396, 397 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389, 401
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 401, 583 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 466 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 465, 466 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396, 397 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 10
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
604 INDEX
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .445 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .20
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 40
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 219
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Uconnect
Transfer Case Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . .260, 281
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 260, 281
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358, 360, 519 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 22
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519, 553 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . .258, 278
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .258, 278
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258, 278
INDEX 605
Uconnect Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 144, 507
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Water
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397, 431, 432 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .17 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323, 543 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 144
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498, 499 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .219 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 10
Washer Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
vehicles electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicles electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
2015 Challenger
2015
OWNERS MANUAL
Challenger
FCA US LLC
15D491-126-AF Sixth Edition Printed in U.S.A.

2015 Challenger OM 6th

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Challenger OM 6th

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Challenger OM 6th

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Challenger

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 3

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 4

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 5

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 6

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 7

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 8

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Keyless Push Button Ignition

Emergency Key Removal

Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-

Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter Case

This device may not cause harmful interference.

Battery at an acceptable charge level

Power Door Locks

Trunk Passive Entry Button

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking

Power Window Switches

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

Tether Strap Anchorages

ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Rear Detection Zones

Rear Cross Path If Equipped

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

Manual Front Seatback Recline

Easy Entry Lever

NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the

Folding Rear Seat

Hood Safety Catch Location

Hood Release Lever

The headlight switch is located on the left side of 3

Fog Light Switch

Intermittent Wiper System

Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Electronic Speed Control Buttons

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Adaptive Cruise Control Off

Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

Turn Or Bend Example

ACC Hill Example

Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example